User manual | DELL 5130cdn printer user guide manual Operating Instructions

Dell™ 5130cdn Color Laser Printer User's Guide
Before Beginning
Dell™ 5130cdn Color Laser Printer User's
Guide
Finding Information
About the Printer
Setting Up the Printer (Printer Setup)
Prepare Printer Hardware
Install Optional Accessories (if
applicable)
Connect Printer to Computer or Network
Perform Initial Settings
Install Printer Drivers on the Windows
Computers
Install the PPD File on Macintosh
Computers
Using Your Printer
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Know Your Printer
Printer Settings
Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Understanding the Printer Menus
Understanding Your Printer Software
Printing Using ColorTrack (External
Authentication)
Using Digital Certificates
Understanding Fonts
Understanding Printer Messages
Printing With Web Services on Devices
(WSD)
Printing With UX Filter (UNIX)
Printing With CUPS (Linux)
Printer Specifications
Maintaining Your Printer
Print Media Guidelines
Maintaining Your Printer
Loading Print Media
Removing Options
Operator Panel
Clearing Jams
Printing
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Appendix
Appendix
Notes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the
problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server,
Windows Vista, and Active Directory are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries; MAC OS is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.; Adobe is either a registered trademark or
a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademarks
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and
names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
As for RSA BSAFE
RSA BSAFE software, produced by RSA Security Inc., has been installed on this printer.
____________________
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the
Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas,
78682, USA.
November 2009 Rev. A01
Back to Contents Page
Dell™ 5130cdn Color Laser Printer User's Guide
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your printer. For information on other
documentation included with your printer, see "Finding Information."
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
1. Double-click the icon on your desktop.
If you cannot find the icon on your desktop, follow the procedure below.
a. Click DLRMM.EXE from "C:\Program Files\Dell Printers\Additional Color Laser
Software\Reorder".
NOTE: "C:\Program Files\" may be different depending on the destination of the folder which you installed
the Dell software and documentation.
b. Click File on the toolbar, and click Create Shortcut on the drop-down menu that appears.
c. Right-click on the shortcut icon that is created.
d. Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click Desktop (create shortcut) on the submenu
that appears.
2. Visit the Dell Printer Supplies website at www.dell.com/supplies, or order Dell printer supplies by phone.
For best service, have your Dell printer Service Tag available.
For help locating your Service Tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Finding Information
NOTE: The following are options you can buy separately.
USB cable
Ethernet cable
Parallel cable
Wireless adapter
550-sheet feeder
1100-sheet feeder
Hard disk
Upgradable Memory Module
Output Expander
What are you looking
for?
Find it here
Drivers and Utilities CD
Drivers for my
printer
My User's Guide
The Drivers and Utilities CD contains Setup Video, Maintenance Video, documentation, and
drivers for your printer. You can use the CD to uninstall/reinstall drivers or access the Setup
Video and documentation.
Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical
changes to your printer or advanced technical reference material for experienced users or
technicians.
Quick Reference Guide
How to use my
printer
Product Information Guide
Safety information
Warranty
information
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in your Product Information Guide
prior to setting up and operating your printer.
Setup diagram
How to set up my
printer
Troubleshooting
"Troubleshooting"
Express Service Code
and Service Tag
The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located on the right side of the toner cartridge
inside the front cover and on the rear cover of your printer.
See the Dell Support website at support.dell.com
Latest drivers for
my printer
Answers to
technical service
and support
questions
Documentation for
my printer
The Dell Support website, support.dell.com, provides several online tools, including:
Solutions - Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online
courses
Upgrades - Upgrade information for components, such as printer driver
Customer Care - Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair
information
Downloads - Drivers
Manuals - Printer documentation and product specifications
You can access the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Select your region on the
support page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
About the Printer
Front, Side, and Back View
Operator Panel
Securing the Printer
Ordering Supplies
The following illustrations show the standard Dell™ 5130cdn Color Laser Printer and some optional accessories.
Front, Side, and Back View
Front View
1 Center Output Tray
2 Right Hand Cover
3 Waste Toner Box
4 Inner Cover
5 550-Sheet Feeder (optional) 6 1100-Sheet Feeder (optional)
7 Tray 1
8 Front Cover
9 Belt Unit
NOTE: Your printer allows for a maximum of 6 trays (Tray 1, two 550-sheet feeders, 1100-sheet feeder, and MPF).
NOTE: The following combinations of trays are available:
Tray 1
Tray 1 + 550-sheet feeder x 1
Tray 1 + 550-sheet feeder x 2
Tray 1 + 550-sheet feeder x 1 + 1100-sheet feeder
Tray 1 + 550-sheet feeder x 2 + 1100-sheet feeder
Tray 1 + 1100-sheet feeder
However, you cannot combine two 1100-sheet feeders.
Right View
1 Duplexer
2 Right Hand Cover Handle
3 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 4 Power Switch
5 Transfer Roller
6 Fuser
Left View
Output Expander (optional)
1 Stacker Tray 2 H Transport Unit
3 Knob
Rear View
4 Stapler Cartridge
1 Control Board Cover
2 Ethernet Port
3 Wireless Adapter Socket
4 USB Port
5 Parallel Port
6 Power Connector for Main Unit
7 Power Connector for Output Expander 8 Control Board
NOTE: When you use the printer with the MPF opened, do not locate the printer in direct sunlight. Doing so may
cause a malfunction or unnatural screen image.
Provide enough room to open the printer tray, covers, and option. It is also important to allow space around the printer
for proper ventilation.
Operator Panel
For details on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel."
Securing the Printer
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot of your printer.
For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.
Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your
printer in your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to
order toner for your printer.
You can also order toner cartridges by the following method:
1. Click start ® All Programs ® Dell Printers ® Additional Color Laser Software ® Dell Supplies Management
System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2. Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3. If ordering from the Web:
a. When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two-way communication, a window that
prompts you to type the Service Tag appears. Type your Dell printer Service Tag in the field provided.
Your Service Tag is located inside the front cover of your printer.
b. Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list.
c. Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the Order by Phone heading.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Prepare Printer Hardware
Removing Tape
Removing the Drum Ribbons
Installing the Toner Cartridges
Loading Paper
Removing Tape
1. Remove the tape from the printer.
2. Remove the instruction sheet from the printer.
Refer to this sheet for setting up the drums and the toner cartridges.
Removing the Drum Ribbons
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the ribbons (8), then remove the packaging material from the front of the printer.
Installing the Toner Cartridges
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Ready the toner cartridges for installation.
3. Shake the yellow cartridge 5 to 6 times to distribute the toner evenly.
NOTE: Do not touch the area shown in the illustration when you shake the cartridge.
4. Align the arrow on the cartridge with the arrow on the printer, and slide in the cartridge until it stops.
5. Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to install magenta, cyan, and black cartridges.
6. Close the front cover.
Loading Paper
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while a printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
NOTE: For printing from the MPF or envelope printing, see "Loading Print Media."
All trays are loaded the same way:
1. Remove the paper tray from the printer.
2. Adjust the width guides to the size of paper to be loaded.
3. Adjust the length guide to the size of paper to be loaded.
4. Before loading the paper, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a
level surface.
5. Load paper into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
6. After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted, replace the paper tray into the printer.
7. Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than plain print media is loaded. If a userspecified print media is loaded in the standard 550-sheet tray, you must specify the paper size setting by using the
operator panel.
NOTE: For standard-size papers, adjust the guides first and then set papers.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Install Optional Accessories (if applicable)
Installing a 550-Sheet Feeder
Installing a 1100-Sheet Feeder
Installing both 550-Sheet Feeders and 1100-Sheet Feeder
Installing an Output Expander
Installing a Memory Module
Installing a Hard Disk
Installing a Wireless Adapter
Configuring a Wireless Adapter
You can make the printer more functional by installing the optional accessories. This chapter describes how to install
printer accessories such as the 550-sheet feeder and wireless adapter.
Installing a 550-Sheet Feeder
CAUTION: If you are adding a 550-sheet feeder after setting up the printer, be sure to turn off the
printer, unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before
completing these tasks.
CAUTION: When lifting the 550-sheet feeder, grasp and lift the printer as instructed on the label of the
feeder.
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2. Pull out the tray until it stops. Lift the front slightly and remove it.
3. Lift the printer and align the three guide pins of the 550-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the printer.
Gently lower the printer onto the 550-sheet feeder.
CAUTION: You need three people to lift the printer.
CAUTION: Be careful not to catch your fingers between the printer and the sheet feeder.
4. Tighten the two screws provided with the feeder using a coin or screw driver.
5. Secure the printer and the 550-sheet feeder with a plastic clamp-lock and the long screw provided with the feeder.
6. Insert the tray into the printer, and push it until it stops.
7. Remove the tray from the 550-sheet feeder.
8. Adjust the width guides to the size of paper to be loaded.
9. Adjust the length guide to the size of paper to be loaded.
10. Load paper into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
11. Replace the tray to the 550-sheet feeder.
12. Connect the power cable to the printer and then to the power source.
13. Fix the power cable on the printer with the plastic fastener.
14. Turn on the printer.
NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel, always do as instructed.
NOTE: The printer will automatically detect the attached tray but will not detect the paper type.
15. Print the printer settings page to verify if the 550-sheet feeder is installed correctly by following the instructions
below. See "Printing Printer Settings Page."
Printing Printer Settings Page
When Using the Operator Panel
a. Press Menu button.
b. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button. Printer Setting is displayed.
c. Press
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
d. Verify 550-Sheet Feeder is listed in the printer settings under Printer Options.
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the 550-sheet feeder.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
a. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1) Open the web browser.
2) Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
b. Select Printer Settings.
c. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
d. Select Reports.
e. Click Start on the Printer Settings.
The printer settings report is printed.
f. Verify if 550-Sheet Feeder is listed in the printer settings.
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the 550-sheet feeder.
16. After loading paper in the installed tray, specify the paper type using the printer operator panel:
a. Press Menu button.
b. Press
button until Tray Settings is highlighted, and then press
c. Press
button until the installed tray is highlighted, and then press
d. Ensure Paper Type is highlighted, and then press
e. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button until the paper type of the installed tray is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
f. Confirm that the selected paper type is marked with a bullet, and then press the Menu button.
NOTE: If you installed the 550-sheet feeder after installing the printer driver, update your driver by following the
instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.
To complete installation of the accessory, the printer driver must be updated to detect it.
Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeder
When Using PCL/XPS Driver
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows ® 7, Windows 7 x64, Windows Vista®,
Windows Vista x64, Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 x64.
Windows ® 7/Windows 7
x64/Windows Server® 2008
R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista®/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:
1. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select any of the available trays from the Paper Tray
Configuration.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then remove the check mark from Enable Bi-Directional
Communication check box.
Select any of the available trays from the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the displayed active dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows 7/Windows 7
x64/Server 2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Printer
properties from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS® X 10.5.x
1. Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2. Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3. Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and
then click OK.
Mac OS X 10.3.x/10.4.x
1. Select the printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer
Setup Utility).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility) menu bar, and
select Show Info.
3. Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed on
the printer, and then click Apply Changes.
Mac OS 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a desktop printer related to the model.
Click Printing on the System menu bar, and select Change Setup.
Select Paper Tray Configuration on the Change menu.
Select the option that has been installed on the printer on the To menu, and
then click OK.
Installing a 1100-Sheet Feeder
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2. Lock down the brakes of the two casters at the front of the optional 1100- sheet feeder.
CAUTION: Failure to lock the brakes can cause the printer to move unexpectedly, resulting in personal
injury.
NOTE: For easier and safer locking, make the brakes of the two casters face forward by pushing the 1100-sheet
feeder backward.
3. Pull out the tray until it stops. Lift the front of the tray slightly and remove it.
4. Lift the printer and align the three guide pins of the optional 1100-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the
printer. Gently lower the printer onto the 1100-sheet feeder.
CAUTION: You need three people to lift the printer.
CAUTION: Be careful not to catch your fingers between the printer and the sheet feeder.
5. Tighten the two screws provided with the feeder using a coin or screw driver.
6. Secure the printer and the 1100-sheet feeder with a plastic clamp-lock and the long screw provided with the
feeder.
7. Insert the tray into the printer, and push until it stops.
8. Remove the tray from the 1100-sheet feeder.
9. Adjust the width guides to the size of paper to be loaded.
10. Adjust the length guide to the size of paper to be loaded.
11. Load paper into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
12. Return the tray to the 1100-sheet feeder.
13. Connect the power cable to the printer and then to the power source.
14. Fix the power cable on the printer with the plastic fastener.
15. Turn on the printer.
NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel, always do as instructed.
NOTE: The printer will automatically detect the attached tray(s) but will not detect the paper type.
16. Print a printer settings page to verify the 1100-sheet feeder is installed correctly by following the instructions. See
"Printing Printer Settings Page."
Printing Printer Settings Page
When Using the Operator Panel
a. Press Menu button.
b. Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button. Printer Setting is displayed.
c. Press
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
d. Verify 1100-Sheet Feeder is listed in the printer settings under Printer Options.
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the 1100-sheet feeder.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
a. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1) Open the web browser.
2) Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
b. Select Printer Settings.
c. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
d. Select Reports.
e. Click Start on the Printer Settings.
The printer settings report is printed.
f. Verify 1100-Sheet Feeder is listed in the printer settings.
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the 1100-sheet feeder.
17. After loading paper in the installed tray, specify the paper type from the printer operator panel.
a. Press Menu button.
b. Press
button until Tray Settings is highlighted, and then press
c. Press
button until the installed tray is highlighted, and then press
d. Ensure that Paper Type is highlighted, and then press
e. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button until the paper type for the installed tray is highlighted, and then press
f. Confirm that the selected paper type is marked with a bullet, and then press Menu button.
(Set) button.
NOTE: If you installed the 1100-sheet feeder after installing the printer driver, update your driver by
following the instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each
client.
To complete installation of the accessory, the printer driver must be updated to detect it.
Updating Your Driver to Detect 1100-Sheet Feeder
When Using PCL/XPS Driver
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7, Windows 7 x64, Windows Vista,
Windows Vista x64, Windows Server 2008 R2 x64, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 x64.
Windows ® 7/Windows 7
x64/Windows Server® 2008
R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista®/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:
1. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select any of the available trays from the Paper Tray
Configuration.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then remove the check mark from Enable Bi-Directional
Communication check box.
Select any of the available trays from the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the displayed active dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows 7/Windows 7
x64/Server 2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Printer
properties from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS® X 10.5.x
1. Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2. Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3. Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and
then click OK.
Mac OS X 10.3.x/10.4.x
1. Select the printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer
Setup Utility).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility) menu bar, and
select Show Info.
3. Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed on
the printer, and then click Apply Changes.
Mac OS 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a desktop printer related to the model.
Click Printing on the System menu bar, and select Change Setup.
Select Paper Tray Configuration on the Change menu.
Select the option that has been installed on the printer on the To menu, and
then click OK.
Installing both 550-Sheet Feeders and 1100-Sheet Feeder
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2. Lock down the brakes of the two casters at the front of optional 1100-sheet feeder.
CAUTION: Failure to lock down the brakes can cause the printer to move unexpectedly, resulting in
personal injury.
NOTE: For easier and safer locking, make the brakes of the two casters face forward by pushing the 1100-sheet
feeder backward.
3. Pull out the tray until it stops. Lift the front slightly and remove it.
4. Lift the 550-sheet feeder and align the three guide pins of the 1100-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of
the 550-sheet feeder.
When lifting the 550-sheet feeder, grasp it as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION: When carrying the 550-sheet feeder, do not grasp the areas shown in the following
illustration:
5. Gently lower the 550-sheet feeder onto the 1100-sheet feeder.
6. Tighten the two screws provided with the feeder using a coin or similar object.
7. Lift the printer and align the three guide pins of the 550-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the printer.
Gently lower the printer onto the 550-sheet feeder.
CAUTION: You need three people to lift the printer.
CAUTION: Be careful not to catch your fingers between the printer and the 1100-sheet feeder.
8. Pull out the tray from the printer until it stops. Lift the front slightly and remove it.
9. Tighten the two screws provided with the feeder using a coin or similar object.
10. Secure the printer and the 550-sheet feeder with a plastic clamp-locks and the longer screws provided with the
feeder.
NOTE: When you have two 550-sheet feeders, repeat Step 4 to Step 10.
11. Insert the tray into the printer.
12. Remove the trays from the 550-sheet feeder and the 1100-sheet feeder.
13. Adjust the width guides to the size of paper to be loaded.
14. Adjust the length guide to the size of paper to be loaded.
15. Load paper into the trays with the recommended print side facing up.
16. Return the trays loaded with paper to the feeders.
17. Connect the power cable to the printer and then to the power source.
18. Fix the power cable on the printer with the plastic fastener.
19. Turn on the printer.
NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel, always do as instructed.
NOTE: The printer will automatically detect the attached tray(s) but will not detect the paper type.
20. Print a printer settings page to verify the 550-sheet feeder and 1100-sheet feeder are installed correctly by
following the instructions below. See "Printing Printer Settings Page."
Printing Printer Settings Page
When Using the Operator Panel
a. Press Menu button.
b. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button. Printer Setting is displayed.
c. Press
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
d. Verify 550-Sheet Feeder and 1100-Sheet Feeder are listed in the printer settings under Printer
Options.
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the 550-sheet feeder and
the 1100-sheet feeder.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
a. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1) Open the web browser.
2) Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
b. Select Printer Settings.
c. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
d. Select Reports.
e. Click Start on the Printer Settings.
The printer settings report is printed.
f. Verify if 550-Sheet Feeder and 1100-Sheet Feeder are listed in the printer settings.
If the feeders are not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the 550-sheet feeder
and the 1100-sheet feeder.
21. After loading paper in the installed tray, specify the paper type from the printer operator panel.
a. Press Menu button.
b. Press
button until Tray Settings is highlighted, and then press
c. Press
button until the installed tray is highlighted, and then press
d. Ensure Paper Type is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
e. Press
button until the paper type for the installed tray is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
f. Confirm that the selected paper type is marked with a bullet, and then press Menu button.
NOTE: If you installed the 550-sheet feeder and the 1100-sheet feeder after installing the printer driver, update
your driver by following the instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver
for each client.
To complete installation of the accessory, the printer driver must be updated to detect it.
Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeders and 1100-Sheet
Feeder
When Using PCL/XPS Driver
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7, Windows 7 x64, Windows Vista,
Windows Vista x64, Windows Server 2008 R2 x64, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 x64.
Windows ® 7/Windows 7
x64/Windows Server® 2008
R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista®/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable BiDirectional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:
1. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select any of the available trays from the Paper Tray
Configuration.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then remove the check mark from Enable Bi-Directional
Communication check box.
Select any of the available trays from the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the displayed active dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows 7/Windows 7
x64/Server 2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Printer
properties from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the paper tray configuration
under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select any of the available trays from
the Paper Tray Configuration.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS® X 10.5.x
1. Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2. Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3. Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and
then click OK.
Mac OS X 10.3.x/10.4.x
1. Select the printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer
Setup Utility).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility) menu bar, and
select Show Info.
3. Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed on
the printer, and then click Apply Changes.
Mac OS 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a desktop printer related to the model.
Click Printing on the System menu bar, and select Change Setup.
Select Paper Tray Configuration on the Change menu.
Select the option that has been installed on the printer on the To menu, and
then click OK.
Installing an Output Expander
CAUTION: If you install an output expander after setting up the printer, be sure to turn off the printer,
unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before completing these
tasks.
CAUTION: Always grasp and hold the output expander as instructed when moving the expander. Not
doing so could cause you to drop the output expander, resulting in personal injury.
CAUTION: After installing the output expander, visually check to ensure that the expander has been
connected correctly. Improper installation could cause the output expander to detach and fall, causing
personal injury.
CAUTION: When moving the printer, disconnect the output expander from the printer. Not doing so
could cause the output expander to detach and drop, resulting in personal injury.
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2. Remove all packing material from the output expander, except the cardboard cover. Do not remove the protective
cardboard cover until installation is complete.
3. Place the output expander on the left side of the printer.
CAUTION: Always hold the positions shown below when lifting the output expander.
4. Open the tray 1 slightly.
5. Open the front cover.
6. Grasp the tab of the upper panel to slightly pull it outwards, and then pull the panel forward to remove it from the
printer. Repeat the procedure for the lower panel.
7. Close the front cover of the printer.
8. Insert the tray into the printer, and push until it stops.
9. Press the claw to unlatch the center output tray and lift the tray to remove it from the printer.
10. Place the H transport unit on the printer.
11. Attach the bracket as shown in the illustration below.
12. First, tighten the screw on the right side loosely for later adjustment.
Then, tighten the other screw on the left side, and then tighten the right screw firmly.
13. Attach the plastic fastener to the printer to secure the cables.
14. Lift the output expander, align the hole on the expander with the bracket guide, and then hook the expander onto
the bracket guide.
To properly fit the expander to the printer, put pressure on the expander with your hands in the direction shown in
the illustration.
CAUTION: Always hold the marked positions when lifting the output expander.
CAUTION: Check the space between the printer and output expander to confirm that the expander is
connected properly.
If the output expander does not fit in the printer, detach and install it again.
15. Remove the protective cardboard cover from the output expander, and then attach the stacker tray to the output
expander.
First, align the attachment side of tray to the printer. Then slide the tray down until its two projections catch the
holes on the metal panel as shown in the illustration.
16. Attach the parts as shown in the illustration below.
17. Remove the connector cover from the printer.
18. Insert the connector in the socket, and then attach the plastic fastener to the printer to secure the cables.
19. Attach the connector cover 2.
NOTICE: Always keep the power cable away from cover closures.
20. Insert the connector in the socket, and then attach the plastic fastener to the printer to secure the cables.
21. Attach the connector cover 1.
First, attach the left side of the connector cover 1 to the printer. Then close cover 1 as shown in the illustration.
22. Connect the power cable of the output expander to the printer as shown in the illustration.
23. Open the front door of the output expander.
24. Remove the packing material from the stapler cartridge.
NOTE: Ensure that the metal part is lowered as shown in the illustration below.
25. Insert the stapler cartridge in the output expander.
26. Close the front door of the output expander.
27. Turn on the printer.
NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel, always do as instructed.
28. Print a printer settings page to verify the output expander is installed correctly by following the instructions below.
See "Printing Printer Settings Page."
Printing Printer Settings Page
When Using the Operator Panel
a. Press Menu button.
b. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
c. Printer Setting is displayed. Press
The printer settings page is printed.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
d. Verify Output Expander is listed in the printer settings under Printer Options.
If the output expander is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the output
expander.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
a. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1) Open the web browser.
2) Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
b. Select Printer Settings.
c. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
d. Select Reports.
e. Click the Start button on the Printer Settings.
The printer settings report is printed.
f. Verify Output Expander is listed in the printer settings.
If the output expander is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the output
expander.
NOTE: If you installed the output expander after installing the PCL or PS printer driver, update your driver by
following the instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.
To complete installation of the accessory, the printer driver must be updated to detect it.
NOTE: Output expander can be specified on the printer driver only when optional hard disk or RAM disk is available
on the printer driver.
NOTE: When you use XPS driver, the following settings are not required.
Updating Your Driver to Detect Output Expander
When Using PCL Driver:
Windows ® 7/Windows 7 x64/Windows Server®
2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information
from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista®/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound®
Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information
from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information
from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server 2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information
from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information
from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:
1. Click the Options tab, and then select Output Expander on the Items list box.
2. Select Available for the output expander setting.
3. Click Apply, and then click OK.
4. Close the displayed active dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows 7/Windows 7
x64/Server 2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Printer
properties from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm Output Expander is
available under Installable Options.
6. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Output
Expander under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm Output Expander is
available under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Output
Expander under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm Output Expander is
available under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Output
Expander under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm Output Expander is
available under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Output
Expander under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm Output Expander is
available under Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Output
Expander under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS® X 10.5.x
1. Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2. Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3. Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and
then click OK.
Mac OS X 10.3.x/10.4.x
1. Select the printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer
Setup Utility).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility) menu bar, and
select Show Info.
3. Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed on
the printer, and then click Apply Changes.
Mac OS 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a desktop printer related to the model.
Click Printing on the System menu bar, and select Change Setup.
Select Output Expander on the Change menu.
Select the option that has been installed on the printer on the To menu, and
then click OK.
Installing a Memory Module
Your printer comes with 256 MB of memory installed. To increase memory, you can add an optional 1024 MB memory
module on the control board.
1. Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2. Rotate the screw counterclockwise on the metal casing to open the cover.
3. Remove the control board cover.
4. Pay attention to the direction of the memory module to align the notches of the memory module with those of the
slot. With the connector of the memory module toward the slot, insert the memory module vertically into the slot.
Then press down evenly on both sides of the memory module until it stops.
5. Check that the tabs are locked.
6. Install the control board cover.
7. Close the control board cover and rotate the screw clockwise.
8. Turn on the printer.
9. Print the printer settings page to verify that the memory is installed correctly by following the instructions below.
See "Printing Printer Settings Page."
Printing Printer Settings Page
When Using the Operator Panel
a. Press Menu button.
b. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
c. Printer Setting is displayed. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
d. Verify Memory Capacity listed in the printer settings under General.
If the memory capacity has not increased, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the
memory module.
When Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
a. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1) Open the web browser.
2) Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
b. Select Printer Settings.
c. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
d. Select Reports.
e. Press the Start button in the Printer Settings.
f. The printer settings report is printed.
g. Verify Memory Capacity listed in the printer settings.
If the memory capacity has not increased, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the
memory module.
NOTE: If you installed the memory module after installing the PCL or PS printer driver, update your driver by
following the instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.
To complete installation of the accessory, the printer driver must be updated to detect it.
NOTE: Memory module can be specified on the printer driver only when HDD or RAM disk is available on the printer
driver.
NOTE: When you use XPS driver, the following settings are not required.
Updating Your Driver to Detect Memory Module
When Using PCL/XPS Driver
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7, Windows 7 x64, Windows Vista,
Windows Vista x64, Windows Server 2008 R2 x64, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 x64.
Windows 7/Windows 7 x64/Server
2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable
Bi-Directional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the
check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable
Bi-Directional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the
check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then ensure that Enable
Bi-Directional Communication check box is checked. If not, check the
check box.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Windows
Server 2003/Windows Server
2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select Get
Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:
1. When you use PCL driver, click the Options tab, and then select the total amount of the installed printer memory
for the memory capacity setting in the Items list box.
When you use XPS driver, click the Option tab, and then remove the check mark from Enable Bi-Directional
Communication check box.
Select the total amount of the installed printer memory for the memory capacity setting in the Items list box.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the displayed active dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows 7/Windows 7
x64/Server 2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Printer
properties from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the memory capacity on the
Installable Options.
6. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select memory size from Memory
Capacity under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the memory capacity on the
Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select memory size from Memory
Capacity under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the memory capacity on the
Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select memory size from Memory
Capacity under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the memory capacity on the
Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select memory size from Memory
Capacity under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the memory capacity on the
Installable Options.
6. Close the Printers dialog box.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select memory size from Memory
Capacity under Installable Options.
2. Click Apply, and then click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS® X 10.5.x
1. Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2. Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3. Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and
then click OK.
Mac OS X 10.3.x/10.4.x
1. Select the printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer
Setup Utility).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility) menu bar, and
select Show Info.
3. Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed on
the printer, and then click Apply Changes.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
Mac OS 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a desktop printer related to the model.
Click Printing on the System menu bar, and select Change Setup.
Select Memory Capacity on the Change menu.
Select the option that has been installed on the printer on the To menu, and
then click OK.
Installing a Hard Disk
1. Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2. Rotate the screw counterclockwise on the metal casing to open the cover.
3. Remove the control board cover.
4. Insert the two plastic pins on the hard disk into the metal casing holes.
5. Attach the left side spacer to the control board.
6. Connect the hard disk cables to the connectors of the control board.
7. Replace the control board cover.
8. Close the control board cover and then rotate the screw clockwise.
9. Turn on the printer.
NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel, always do as instructed.
10. Print the printer settings page to verify if the optional hard disk is installed correctly by following the instructions.
See "Printing Printer Settings Page."
Printing Printer Settings Page
11. When Using the Operator Panel
a. Press Menu button.
b. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button. Printer Setting is displayed.
c. Press
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
d. Verify if Hard Disk is listed in the printer settings under Printer Options.
If it is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the hard disk.
When Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
a. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1) Open the web browser.
2) Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
b. Select Printer Settings.
c. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
d. Select Reports.
e. Press the Start button in the Printer Settings.
The printer settings report is printed.
f. Verify if Hard Disk is listed in the printer settings under Printer Options.
If it is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the hard disk.
NOTE: If you installed the hard disk after installing the PCL or PS printer driver, update your driver by following the
instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.
To complete installation of the accessory, the printer driver must be updated to detect it.
NOTE: Hard disk can be specified on the printer driver only when HDD or RAM disk is available on the printer
driver.
NOTE: When you use XPS driver, the following settings are not required.
Updating Your Driver to Detect Hard Disk
When Using PCL/XPS Driver
NOTE: When you use XPS driver, the following settings are not required.
Windows 7/Windows 7 x64/Server 2008 R2
x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from
Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from
Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from
Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server 2003/Server 2003
x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from
Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from
Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:
1. Click the Options tab, and then select Hard Disk on the Items list box.
2. Select Available for the hard disk setting.
3. Click Apply, and then click OK.
4. Close the displayed active dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows 7/Windows 7
x64/Server 2008 R2 x64
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Printer
properties from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the storage device on the
Installable Options.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select storage device from Storage
Device under Installable Options.
2. Click OK.
3. Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the storage device on the
Installable Options.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select storage device from Storage
Device under Installable Options.
2. Click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server
2008 x64
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the storage device on the
Installable Options.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select storage device from Storage
Device under Installable Options.
2. Click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Server
2003/Server 2003 x64
1. Click Start® Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the storage device on the
Installable Options.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select storage device from Storage
Device under Installable Options.
2. Click OK.
3. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows 2000
1. Click Start® Settings® Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that uses the PS driver, and then select Properties
from the displayed list.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.
4. Click Apply, and then click OK.
5. Click the Device Settings tab, and then confirm the storage device on the
Installable Options.
If you cannot acquire the printer information using the Get Information from
Printer automatically, try the following procedure:
1. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select storage device from Storage
Device under Installable Options.
2. Click OK.
3. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS® X 10.5.x
1. Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2. Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3. Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and
then click OK.
Mac OS X 10.3.x/10.4.x
1. Select the printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer
Setup Utility).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility) menu bar, and
select Show Info.
3. Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed on
the printer, and then click Apply Changes.
Mac OS 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a desktop printer related to the model.
Click Printing on the System menu bar, and select Change Setup.
Select Storage Device on the Change menu.
Select the option that has been installed on the printer on the To menu, and
then click OK.
Installing a Wireless Adapter
The wireless adapter allows you to use the printer with wireless network connection.
The specifications of wireless adapter are described below:
Item
Specification
Connectivity
Wireless
Connectivity Standard
IEEE802.11b/g/n compliant
Bandwidth
2.4 GHz
Data Transfer Rate
IEEE802.11b mode:11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
IEEE802.11g mode:54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
IEEE802.11n mode:65 Mbps
Security
64(40-bit key)/128(104-bit key) WEP,
WPA-PSK(TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK(AES),
WPA-Enterprise(TKIP, AES)* 1 , * 2 ,
WPA2-Enterprise(AES)* 1 , * 2
* 1 : PEAPV0 MS-CHAPV2 only.
* 2 : This item is available only when the optional hard disk is installed.
NOTE: When the Wireless Adapter is installed, you cannot use IEEE 802.1x authentication and /or the Ethernet port
for a wired connection.
Verifying the Contents of Box
NOTE: To complete wireless setup you will require the Drivers and Utilities CD that comes with your printer. The
configuration utility and drivers can also be downloaded from support.dell.com.
Before Installing a Wireless Adapter
To install the Dell Wireless Adapter, perform one of the following methods.
1. Video instructions (Recommended)
a. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.
b. Click the Wireless Configuration button on the Easy Setup Navigator window and follow the on-screen
instructions until the Configure Your Wireless Printer screen appears.
NOTE: For more information on configuring the Wireless Adapter see "Configuring a Wireless Adapter."
2. Paper instructions
Refer to Installing and Configuring the Wireless Adapter Guide provided with the wireless adapter.
Installing a Wireless Adapter
1. Ensure that the printer is turned off. Then unplug all cables including the power cable from the rear of the printer.
2. Remove the cap from the wireless adapter socket.
3. Align the connector and the three protrusions of the wireless adapter with the four holes and insert the adapter.
NOTE: Ensure that the adapter is fully inserted and secured.
4. Reconnect the power cable and turn on the printer.
NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel, always do as instructed.
5. Print the printer settings page to verify that the wireless adapter is installed correctly by following the instructions
below. See "Printing Printer Settings Page."
Printing Printer Settings Page
When Using the Operator panel
a. Press the Menu button.
b. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press the
c. Printer Settings is displayed. Press the
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The Printer Settings page is printed.
6. Verify that the Network (Wireless) section exists.
NOTE: For more information on configuring the Wireless Adapter see "Configuring a Wireless Adapter."
Determining the Wireless Network Settings
You need to know the wireless network settings to use your printer as a wireless device. For details of the settings,
contact your network administrator.
Wireless
Settings
Security
Settings
SSID
Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Network
Type
Specifies the network type from Ad-hoc or Infrastructure.
Security
Selects the security method from No security, WEP, WPA-PSK TKIP and
WPA2-PSK-AES/WPA-PSK-AES.
Transmit Specifies the transmit key from the list.
Key
WEP Key Specified the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when
WEP is selected for Security.
Pass
Phrase
Specifies the pass phrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 bytes
long only when WPA-PSK is selected for Encryption.
Configuring a Wireless Adapter
This section describes how to configure a wireless adapter through Easy Setup Navigator.
You can select a method to configure a wireless adapter from the following:
Wizard Setup through USB connection
Ethernet connection
Operator Panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Advanced Setup through
WPS-PIN* 1
WPS-PBC* 2
USB connection
* 1 WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi ® Protected setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices
required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed
through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.
* 2 WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required
for wireless configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
NOTE: The optional wireless adapter must be installed on the printer.
NOTE: For information on how to install a wireless adapter, see "Installing a Wireless Adapter."
Using Wizard Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file
launches automatically.
2. Click the Wireless Configuration button on the Easy Setup Navigator window.
The Wireless Configuration window opens.
3. Select Wizard and click Next.
The instruction video starts.
4. Follow on-screen instructions until the Wireless Setting Tool button appears.
5. Click Wireless Setting Tool.
The Wireless Setting Tool starts.
6. Comments appear about connectivity. Click Next.
NOTE: When the printer has already been connected, this screen does not appear. In addition, this screen will not
change to the next screen until the printer is connected.
7. In the list on the Select Printer screen, select the wireless printer you want to set up, and then click Next.
NOTE: When only one printer is connected through the USB, the Select Printer screen does not appear.
8. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, enter your wireless settings, and then click Next.
9. On the Select IP Mode screen, select the IP mode you want to set up, and then click Next.
When IPv4 Only is selected:
On the Enter IPv4 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
When IPv6 Only is selected:
On the Enter IPv6 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
When Dual Stack (both IPv4 and IPv6) is selected:
a. On the Enter IPv4 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Next.
b. On the Enter IPv6 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
10. On the Complete Wireless Settings screen, click Next to complete the wireless setup and close the Wireless
Setting Tool.
Easy Setup Navigator restarts.
11. Follow on-screen instructions to finish configuring the wireless adapter.
Using Advanced Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter
Select Advanced Setup to configure your wireless adapter with one of the following:
Ethernet
Operator Panel
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
WPS-PIN
WPS-PBC
USB
Ethernet
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file
launches automatically.
2. Click the Wireless Configuration button on the Easy Setup Navigator window.
The Wireless Configuration window opens.
3. Select Advanced, and then click Next.
4. Select Ethernet, and then click Next.
The instruction video starts.
5. Follow on-screen instructions until the Wireless Setting Tool button appears.
6. Click Wireless Setting Tool to start wireless setup.
The Wireless Setting Tool starts.
7. If your printer is not listed on the Select Printer screen, click Refresh or Enter IP Address.
On the Enter IP Address screen, enter the existing IP address for the printer.
8. In the list on the Select Printer screen, select the wireless printer you want to setup, and then click Next.
9. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, select each wireless setting, and then click Next.
10. On the Select IP Mode screen, select the IP mode you want, and then click Next.
When IPv4 Only is selected:
On the Enter IPv4 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
When IPv6 Only is selected:
On the Enter IPv6 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
When Dual Stack (both IPv4 and IPv6) is selected:
a. On the Enter IPv4 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Next.
b. On the Enter IPv6 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
11. On the Complete Wireless Settings screen, click Next to complete the wireless setup and close the wireless
setting tool.
Easy Setup Navigator restarts.
12. Follow on-screen instructions to finish configuring the wireless adapter.
Operator Panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file
launches automatically.
2. Click the Wireless Configuration button on the Easy Setup Navigator window.
The Wireless Configuration window opens.
3. Select Advanced, and then click Next.
4. Select Operator Panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and then click Next.
The instruction video starts.
5. Follow on-screen instructions to finish configuring the wireless adapter.
WPS-PIN
NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register
devices required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting,
performed through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Ensure Network is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
4. Press
button until Wireless Setup is highlighted, and then press
5. Press
button until WPS is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
6. Press
button until PIN Code is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
7. Write down the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the first line of the panel display or press
Code is highlighted, and then press
The PIN code is printed.
button until Print PIN
(Set) button.
8. Ensure Start Configuration is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
9. Ensure the message Please wait Wireless Setting is displayed, and then enter the PIN code displayed on the
Step 7 into the wireless LAN access point (Registrar).
NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN
access point.
10. When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection is completed.
WPS-PBC
NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register
devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers,
and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point
supports WPS.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Ensure Network is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
4. Press
button until Wireless Setup is highlighted, and then press
5. Press
button until WPS is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
6. Ensure Push Button Control is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
7. Press
button until PBC Start is highlighted, and then press
8. Press
button until Start is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
9. Ensure the message Please wait Wireless Setting is displayed, and then start the WPS-PBC on the wireless
LAN access point (Registrar), within two minutes of the Step 8 operation.
NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN
access point.
10. When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection is completed.
USB
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file
launches automatically.
2. Click the Wireless Configuration button on the Easy Setup Navigator window.
The Wireless Configuration window opens.
3. Select Advanced, and then click Next.
4. Select USB, and then click Next.
The instruction video starts.
5. Follow on-screen instructions until the Wireless Setting Tool button appears.
6. Click Wireless Setting Tool to start wireless setup.
The Wireless Setting Tool starts.
7. Comments appear about connectivity. Click Next.
NOTE: When the printer has already been connected, this screen does not appear. In addition, this screen will not
change to the next screen until the printer is connected.
8. In the list on the Select Printer screen, select the wireless printer you want to setup, and then click Next.
NOTE: When only one printer is connected through the USB, the Select Printer screen does not appear.
9. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, select each wireless setting, and then click Next.
10. On the Select IP Mode screen, select the IP mode you want, and then click Next.
When IPv4 Only is selected:
On the Enter IPv4 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
When IPv6 Only is selected:
On the Enter IPv6 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
When Dual Stack (both IPv4 and IPv6) is selected:
a. On the Enter IPv4 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Next.
b. On the Enter IPv6 Address Settings screen, select each setting, and then click Send to send the wireless
settings to the printer.
11. On the Complete Wireless Settings screen, click Next to complete the wireless setup and close the wireless
setting tool.
Easy Setup Navigator restarts.
12. Follow on-screen instructions to finish configuring the wireless adapter.
Constructing a New Wireless Network Environment for Your
Computer (When you need to setup your wireless connectivity with
your computer)
For DHCP network:
1. Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:
NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can
change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.
NOTE: Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in Step e and Step g so that you can
restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. Under the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, select your settings according to the
instructions in the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
2. Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the printer.
a. Press Menu on the printer control panel.
b. Scroll down and select Admin Menu.
c. Scroll down and select Network.
d. Scroll down and select TCP/IP.
e. Scroll down and select IPv4.
f. Scroll down and select IP Address.
(Default IP address range: 169.254.xxx.yyy)
IP Address
169.254.000.041*
3. Check that the IP address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the WEB browser.
5. Create wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reboot the printer.
7. Restore the wireless settings on your computer.
NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can
change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.
e. Click Advanced.
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, select your settings according to the
instructions in the manual of the wireless settings tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in the available network list, and
click Connect.
f. Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.
For Fixed IP networks:
1. Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:
NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can
change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.
NOTE: Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in Step d and Step f so that you can
restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. Under the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, select your settings according to the
instructions in the manual of the wireless settings tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.
2. Check the IP address on your computer.
3. Set the IP address on the printer.
a. Press Menu button.
b. Scroll to Admin menu.
c. Select Network.
d. Select TCP/IP.
e. Select Get IP Address.
f. Select Panel.
g. Scroll back to IP Address.
h. Manually enter the IP address using the directional buttons on the control panel and press enter button.
IP Address
172.031.000.041*
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the WEB browser.
5. Change the wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reboot the printer.
7. Restore the wireless settings on your computer.
NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can
change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.
e. Click Advanced.
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, select your settings according to the
instructions in the manual of the wireless settings tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in the available network list, and
click Connect.
f. Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Connect Printer to Computer or Network
Connect Printer to Computer or Network
Print and Check the Printer Settings Page
Assign an IP Address
Verify the IP Settings
Using the Reset Button
Your Dell™ 5130cdn Color Laser Printer interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type Connection specifications
Ethernet
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T
Wireless
IEEE802.11b/802.11g/802.11n
USB
USB 2.0
Parallel
IEEE 1284
1 Ethernet Port
2 Wireless Adapter Socket
3 USB Port
4 Parallel Port
Connect Printer to Computer or Network
Direct Connection
A local printer is a printer attached to your computer using a USB or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a
network instead of your computer, skip this section and go to "Network Connection."
USB Cable
Microsoft ® Windows ® 2000, Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows
Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition and Mac OS ® X or later operating systems
support USB connections. Some UNIX ® and Linux computers also support USB connections. See your computer operating
system documentation to see if your system supports USB.
To attach the printer to a computer:
1. Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are turned off and unplugged from the power
source/outlet.
2. Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port on the back of the printer.
3. Ensure that you match the USB symbol on the cable to the USB symbol on the printer.
4. Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.
NOTICE: Do not connect a USB cable for printers into the USB keyboard.
Parallel Cable
A parallel port requires a parallel cable.
To attach the printer to a computer:
1. Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are turned off and unplugged from the power
source/outlet.
2. Connect the parallel connector into the parallel cable port on the back of the printer.
3. Ensure that you match the parallel symbol on the cable to the parallel symbol on the printer.
4. Secure the fastening clips of the parallel cable.
5. Plug the other end of the cable into a parallel port on the back of the computer.
Network Connection
To attach the printer to a network:
1. Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices have been turned off and all cables have been
disconnected.
2. Connect the network cable or wireless adaptor.
1 Ethernet Port
2 Wireless Adapter Socket
NOTE: To use the wireless adapter, be sure to disconnect the network cable.
To connect the printer to the network, plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the back of the printer,
and the other end into a LAN drop or hub. For a wireless connection, insert the wireless adapter into the wireless adapter
socket on the back of the printer.
For a wireless connection, refer to "Installing a Wireless Adapter."
Print and Check the Printer Settings Page
Print the printer settings page.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Printer Setting is displayed. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
4. If the IP address shows anything other than 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx, the printer has an IP
address assigned and stored. Go to "Verify the IP Settings."
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Enter the IP address of your printer into the web browser.
If you do not know how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool."
The Dell Printer Configuration Tool opens.
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
4. Select Reports.
5. Click the Start button in the Printer Settings.
The printer settings report is printed.
Assign an IP Address
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 Mode, use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. To
open the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link local address. (To check a link local address, see
"Print and Check the Printer Settings Page.")
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to three
digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44.
Assigning an IP address already in use can cause network performance issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system
administrator.
NOTE: Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may be different. On Class A, for
example, an IP address in the range from 0.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 will be assigned. For assignment of IP
addresses, contact your system administrator.
When Using the Operator Panel
For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel."
1. Turn on the printer.
The Ready to Print appears.
2. Press Menu button.
3. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
4. Ensure Network is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
5. Press
button until TCP/IP appears, and then press
6. Press
button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
7. Ensure Get IP Address is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
8. Press
button until Panel is highlighted, and then press
9. Press
button until IP Address is highlighted, and then press
10. The first digit of the IP address is highlighted. Press
11. Press
(Set) button.
or
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button to enter the numbers for the IP address.
button.
The next digit is highlighted.
12. Repeat Step 8 and Step 9 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and then press
13. Press
button until Subnet Mask is highlighted, and then press
14. Repeat Step 8 to Step 9 to set Subnet Mask, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
15. Press
button until Gateway Address is highlighted, and then press
16. Repeat Step 8 to Step 9 to set Gateway Address, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
17. Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
When Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool (for IPv4 Mode)
1. Enter the IP address of your printer into the web browser.
If you do not know how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool."
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens.
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Print Server Reports tab.
TCP/IP Settings page opens.
4. Select mode from IP Mode.
5. Select IP Address Mode.
6. Enter the addresses in IP Address, Manual Subnet Mask, and Manual Gateway Address.
When Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool (for IPv6 Mode)
1. Enter the IP address of your printer into the web browser.
If you do not know how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool."
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens.
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Print Server Reports tab.
TCP/IP Settings page opens.
4. Enter the IP addresses.
When enabling the Stateless addresses:
Select the check box for Enable Stateless Address to automatically configure IP addresses.
When entering the addresses manually:
Select the check box for Use Manual Address, and then enter the addresses in Manual Address and
Manual Gateway Address respectively.
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with installer. When you use the
Network Installation feature, and the Get IP Address is set to AutoIP on the operator panel menu, you can set the IP
address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window.
Verify the IP Settings
1. Print another printer settings page.
2. Look under the TCP/IP heading on the printer settings page to ensure that the IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway are what you expected.
or
Ping the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network computer, type ping
followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.168.0.11):
ping 192.168.0.11
If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.
Using the Reset Button
Your printer is supplied with an electric leakage detector, which prevents electric shock or fire due to electric leakage by
automatically cutting circuits inside the printer.
When electric leakage is detected, the RESET button is tripped. In this case, press the RESET button to turn the printer
back on. If the RESET button trips again after pressing the RESET button, contact Dell.
Check whether or not the electric leakage detector is functioning at least once a month by following the steps below:
1. Turn on the printer, and then press the TEST button.
If the RESET button is tripped and the printer is turned off, the electric leakage detector functions correctly.
Press the RESET button to turn the printer back on.
If the RESET button is not tripped, contact Dell. Do not continue to use the printer if the electric leakage
detector is not functioning.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Perform Initial Settings
Turning On the Printer
Set Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
Turning On the Printer
The connection port for the power cable is at the lower left on the back of the printer.
1. Connect the power cable to the printer. Then, fix the power cable on the printer with the plastic fastener.
CAUTION: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
CAUTION: The printer should not be plugged into a UPS system.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the power source.
3. Turn on the printer.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions in the operator panel to configure the initial settings of your printer.
Set Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, clock date, and time when you turn on printer for the first time.
When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the operator panel. Follow the
steps below to set the initial settings.
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Ready to Print appears on the operator panel in three
minutes. After that, you can set the following initial setup by enabling Power on Wizard on the operator panel or
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool if needed.
For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus."
For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1. Ensure Panel Language is highlighted, and then press
operator panel, and then press
English
Français
Italiano
(Set) button.
(Set) button. Determine the language of the text on the
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska
2. Set Time Zone appears. Specify the time zone, and then press
(Set) button.
Select a time zone from the drop-down list:
UTC 12:00
-
UTC 11:00
UNITED STATES
UTC 10:00
UNITED STATES
UTC 09:00
UNITED STATES
UTC 08:00
CANADA, UNITED STATES, MEXICO
UTC 07:00
CANADA, UNITED STATES, MEXICO
UTC 06:00
CANADA, UNITED STATES, MEXICO
UTC 05:00
BRAZIL, CANADA, UNITED STATES, COLOMBIA
UTC 04:00
BRAZIL, CANADA, PURETO RICO, TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO
UTC 03:30
BRAZIL, CANADA
UTC 03:00
BRAZIL
UTC 02:00
BRAZIL
UTC 01:00
ALGERIA, AUSTRIA, BELGIUM, DENMARK
UTC
00:00
ICELAND, IRELAND, MOROCCO, PORTUGAL, UNITED KINGDOM, IVORY COAST
UTC
DENMARK, CZECH REPUBLIC, FRANCE, GERMANY, HUNGARY, ITALY, LIECHTENSTEIN,
+01:00 LUXEMBOURG, MALTA, NETHERLANDS, NORWAY, POLAND, SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA,
SPAIN, SWEDEN, SWITZERLAND, TUNISIA,
UTC
BULGARIA, CYPRUS, EGYPT, ESTONIA, FINLAND, GREECE, ISRAEL, JORDAN, LATVIA,
+02:00 LEBANON, LITHUANIA, ROMANIA, SOUTH AFRICA, TURKEY, RUSSIAN FEDERATION
UTC
KUWAIT, QATAR, SAUDI ARABIA, TURKEY, BAHRAIN, IRAQ, RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+03:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+03:30
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION, OMAN, UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
+04:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION, AFGHANISTAN
+04:30
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+05:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+05:30
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+05:45
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+06:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+06:30
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+07:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION, PHILIPPINES, SINGAPORE, AUSTRALIA
+08:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION, JAPAN, SOUTH KOREA
+09:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION, AUSTRALIA
+09:30
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION, AUSTRALIA
+10:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
+11:00
UTC
RUSSIAN FEDERATION, NEW ZEALAND
+12:00
UTC
+13:00
3. Date Format appears. Specify the date format, and then press
(Set) button.
4. Time Format appears. Specify the time format, and then press
(Set) button.
5. Set Date appears. Specify the current date, and then press
(Set) button.
6. Set Time appears. Specify the current time, and then press
(Set) button.
7. Exit Menu appears. Select Start to exit initial settings menu.
The printer automatically restarts after resetting your regional clock.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Install Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers
Identify Printer Driver Pre-install Status
Insert the Drivers and Utility CD
Direct Connection Setup
Network Connection Setup
Setting Up for Shared Printing
Setup Security
Troubleshooting Instructions
Identify Printer Driver Pre-install Status
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, print the printer settings page to check your printer's IP address.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Printer Settings is displayed, and then Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
4. Look under the TCP/IP heading on the printer settings page.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP address automatically, and then print the printer settings page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, refer to "Assign an IP Address."
Disable Microsoft ® Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows
Vista® , or Windows 7 Firewall Before Installing Printer Software
NOTE: This step is necessary if you have Windows XP Service Pack 2 or 3 installed.
If your printer is connected directly to a network and the Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, or Windows XP firewall is enabled,
you cannot view your networked printer(s) when you run the Dell™ printer installation software. To prevent this situation, disable the Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, or Windows XP firewall before you install the Dell printer software. To disable or enable your Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, or Windows XP firewall, perform the following steps.
NOTICE: It is recommended that you enable your Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, or Windows XP firewall after you
install the printer software. Enabling the Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, or Windows XP firewall after you install the
printer software does not limit the use of your printer.
1. Click the start button and click Help and Support.
NOTE: For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7, if you use Online Help, switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support window.
2. In the Search box, type firewall and then press Enter.
In the list, click Turn Windows Firewall on or off and then follow the instructions on the screen.
Insert the Drivers and Utility CD
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to start Easy Setup Navigator.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click start® All Programs (for Windows Vista and Windows 7)® Accessories (for Windows Vista and Windows
7)® Run, and then type D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.
Direct Connection Setup
For installing PS and PCL printer driver
1. Click Software Installation to launch the installation software.
2. Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable, and then turn the printer on.
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically.
NOTE: If the installation software does not automatically proceed to the next page, click Install.
4. Select either Typical Installation or Custom Installation from the installation wizard, and then click Install. If you select Custom Installation, you can select
the specific software you want to install.
5. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
USB Printing
A personal printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server using a USB. If your printer is attached to a network and not your computer, see "Network
Connection Setup."
For installing XPS printer driver
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7, Windows 7 x64, Windows Vista, Windows Vista x64, Windows Server 2008 R2 x64,
Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 x64.
1. Uncompress the following folder on the desktop, etc.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_VistaXP2K\XPS_5130.zip(where D is the drive letter of your CD)
2. Click start ® Control Panel ® Hardware and Sound (only for Windows Vista) ® Printers.
3. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
4. Click Add a local printer.
5. Select the port connected to this product and click Next.
6. Specify the printer model. Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7. Select the folder uncompressed in step 1.
8. A dialog box to specify printer name is displayed. To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box. To use this printer as the default
printer, check on the check box displayed under the Printer name.
9. Installation starts. If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears asking whether to continue the installation in the middle of installation, click
Continue.
NOTE: Depending on User's right, which you logged in with, Administrator name and password may be required. In that case, enter the Administrator name and
password.
10. The driver installation is completed. If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
Network Connection Setup
NOTE: To use this printer in a UNIX or Linux environment, you need to install a UX Filter or Linux Driver. For more information on how to install and use these, see
"Printing With UX Filter (UNIX)" and "Printing With CUPS (Linux)."
NOTE: When using a CD drive in a Linux environment, you need to mount the CD according to your system environment. The command strings are
mount/media/cdrom.
Network Printer Setup on a Local Network
For installing PS and PCL printer driver
1. Click Software Installation to launch the installation software.
2. Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3. Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
4. Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next. If the target printer is not displayed on the list, click Refresh to refresh the list or click
Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP address.
NOTE: In some cases, Windows Security Alert is displayed in this step when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, or Windows 7 64-bit Edition. In this case, select Unblock (Allow
access for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7), and then continue the procedure.
5. Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.
a. Enter the printer name.
b. If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select Share this printer with other computers on the network, and then enter a share
name that users will easily identify.
c. If you want to set a printer as the default, select the Set this printer as default check box.
d. If you want to restrict color printing, select the appropriate Dell ColorTrack option. Enter the password when Color-Password Enabled is selected for Dell
ColorTrack.
e. If you want to install the PostScript driver, select the PostScript Driver check box.
6. Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Next. You can specify folders in which to install the Dell software and documentation. To
change the folders, click Browse.
7. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears. If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
For installing XPS printer driver
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7, Windows 7 x64, Windows Vista, Windows Vista x64, Windows Server 2008 R2 x64,
Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 x64.
1. Uncompress the following folder on the desktop, etc.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_VistaXP2K\XPS_5130.zip (where D is the drive letter of your CD)
2. Click start ® Control Panel ® Hardware and Sound (only for Windows Vista) ® Printers.
3. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
4. Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5. Specify the printer name. Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed and enter the name of the printer to be connected.
6. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or Hostname, and then select Standard TCP/IP Port from Create a new port. Click Next.
7. Enter the IP address for the printer into Hostname or IP address and click Next.
8. Specify the printer model. Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9. Select the folder uncompressed in step 1.
10. A dialog box to specify printer name is displayed. To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box. To use this printer as the default
printer, check on the check box displayed under the Printer name.
11. Installation starts. If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears asking whether to continue the installation in the middle of installation, click
Continue.
NOTE: Depending on User's right, which you logged in with, Administrator name and password may be required. In that case, enter the Administrator name and
password.
12. The driver installation is completed. If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer
configuration settings, monitor toner level, and when it is time to order replacement consumables, just click the Dell supplies link right from your web browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is locally attached to a computer or a print server.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser, and the printer configuration appears on the screen.
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
2. Click E-Mail Alert link.
3. Under Setup E-Mail Lists and Alerts, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway, the Reply Address, and enter your e-mail address or the key operator's e- mail address
in the e-mail list box.
4. Click Apply New Settings.
NOTE: The SMTP server will display Connection in Progress until an error occurs.
Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network
Before Installation
Before you start remote installation, perform the following procedures.
Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003
x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008:
1. Click start® All Programs (for Windows Vista only)® Accessories (for Windows Vista only)® Run.
2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3. Click Computer Configuration® Administrative Templates® Printers.
4. Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Properties.
5. From the Setting tab, select Enabled, and then click OK.
6. Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1. Click Start® All Programs (for Windows 7 only)® Accessories (for Windows 7 only)® Run.
2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3. Click Computer Configuration® Administrative Templates® Printers.
4. Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Edit.
5. Select Enabled, and then click OK.
6. Restart the computer.
Share the Firewall File and Printer
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008
64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows Vista:
1. Click start® Control Panel.
2. Select Security.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Click Change settings.
5. Click Continue.
6. From the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008:
1. Click start® Control Panel.
2. Double-Click Windows Firewall.
3. Click Change settings.
4. From the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1. Click Start® Control Panel.
2. Select System and Security.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Click Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall.
5. If the check boxes under Allowed programs and features: are dimmed, click Change settings.
6. Check the File and Printer Sharing check box. Home/Work (Private) or Public check box is automatically selected according to your settings.
If File and Printer Sharing Properties dialog box appears, click OK.
7. Click OK.
For Windows XP:
1. Click start® Control Panel.
2. Select Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. From the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.
Start Remote Registry
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
1. Click Start® Control Panel.
2. Select System and Maintenance (System and Security for Windows 7).
3. Click Administrative Tools.
4. Double-click Services.
5. Click Continue (for Windows Vista only).
6. Right-click Remote Registry and select Start.
7. Right-click Remote Registry and select Properties.
8. Change Startup type: to Automatic, and then click OK.
Disable User Account Control
NOTICE: Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to virus attacks.
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2
64-bit Edition, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows Vista:
1. Click start® Control Panel.
2. Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
3. Click User Accounts.
4. Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
5. Click Continue.
6. Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer check box.
7. Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008:
1. Click start® Control Panel.
2. Double-Click User Accounts.
3. Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
4. Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer check box.
5. Click OK.
6. Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1. Click Start® Control Panel.
2. Select User Accounts.
3. Click User Accounts.
4. Click Change User Account Control Settings.
5. Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6. Restart the computer.
For Windows 7:
1. Click Start® Control Panel.
2. Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
3. Click User Accounts.
4. Click Change User Account Control Settings.
5. Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6. Click Yes in User Account Control dialog box.
7. Restart the computer.
Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks
You can skip "Disable User Account Control" for this procedure.
NOTE: This step is required when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition for the server computer.
1. Click Start® Network (Start® your user name® Network for Windows 7).
2. Click Network discovery and file sharing are turned off. Network computers and devices are not visible. Click to change.
3. Click Turn on network discovery and file sharing.
4. Click Yes, turn on network discovery and file sharing for all public networks.
Disable Simple File Sharing
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, and Windows XP 64-bit Edition.
1. Click start® Control Panel.
2. Select Appearance and Themes.
3. Select Folder Options.
4. From the View tab, clear the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check box, and then click OK.
5. Click start® Control Panel.
6. Select Performance and Maintenance.
7. Select Administrative Tools.
8. Click Local Security Policy.
9. Click Local Policies® Security Options.
10. Right-click Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts and select Properties.
11. Ensure Classic - local users authenticate as themselves is selected.
Installing the Printer Driver
NOTE: Installation on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic, Windows Vista Home Premium, Windows Vista x64 Home Basic, Windows Vista x64
Home Premium, Windows 7 Starter, Windows 7 Home Basic, Windows 7 Home Premium, Windows 7 x64 Home Basic, and Windows 7 x64 Home Premium is not
supported.
1. Press Software Installation to launch the installation software.
2. Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3. Select Remote Installation, and then click Next.
a. Enter the computer name, user ID, and password. Then, click Add.
b. Click Next.
NOTE: In some cases, Windows Security Alert is displayed in this step when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, or Windows 7 64-bit Edition. In this case, select Unblock (Allow
access for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7), and then continue the procedure.
4. Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next. If the target printer is not displayed on the list, click Refresh to refresh the list or click
Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP address.
5. Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.
a. Enter the printer name.
b. If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select Share this printer with other computers on the network, and then enter a share
name that users will easily identify.
c. If you want to set a printer as the default, select the Set this printer as default check box.
d. If you want to restrict color printing, select the appropriate Dell ColorTrack option. Enter the password when Color-Password Enabled is selected for Dell
ColorTrack.
6. Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Next. You can specify folders in which to install the Dell software and documentation. To
change the folders, click Input.
7. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer
configuration settings, monitor toner level, and when it is time to order replacement consumables, just click the Dell supplies link right from your web browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is locally attached to a computer or a print server.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser, and the printer configuration appears on the screen.
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
2. Click E-Mail Alert link.
3. Under E-Mail Server Settings, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway, the Reply Address, and enter your e-mail address or the key operator's e-mail address in the
e-mail list box.
4. Click Apply New Settings.
NOTE: The SMTP server will display Connection pending until printer sends an alert until an error occurs.
Setting Up for Shared Printing
You can share your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer, or using Microsoft ® point and print or peer-to-peer method.
However, if you use one of the Microsoft methods, you will not have all the features, such as the status monitor and other printer utilities, that are installed with the Drivers
and Utilities CD.
To share a locally-attached printer on the network, you need to share the printer, and then install the shared printer on network clients:
NOTE: The following are options you need to buy separately for shared printing.
Ethernet cable
Windows ® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000
1. Click start® Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
2. Right-click this printer icon and select Properties.
3. From the Sharing tab, check the Share this printer (Share as for Windows 2000) check box, and then type a name in the Share name (Share as for Windows
2000) text box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients printing to this printer.
5. Click OK.
If you are missing files, you will be prompted to insert the server operating system CD.
Windows Vista ®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1. Click start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Right-click this printer icon and select Sharing.
3. Click Change sharing options button.
4. The dialog box displaying "Windows needs your permission to continue" appears.
5. Click Continue button.
6. Check the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
7. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients printing to this printer.
8. Click OK.
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1. Click start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Right-click this printer icon and select Sharing.
3. Click Change Sharing Options button if exists.
Check the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients printing to this printer.
5. Click OK.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3. From the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options button if exists.
Check the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients printing to this printer.
5. Click Apply, and then click OK.
To check that the printer is successfully shared:
Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes, or Devices and Printers folder is shared. A icon of sharing is shown underneath the printer
icon.
Browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server and look for the shared name you assigned to the printer.
Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients using the point and print method or the peer-to-peer method.
Point and Print
This method is usually the best use of system resources. The server handles driver modifications and print job processing. This lets network clients return to their programs
much faster.
If you use the point and print method, a subset of driver information is copied from the server to the client computer. This is just enough information to send a print job to
the printer.
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000
1. On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My Network Places.
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
Wait for the driver information to copy from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers and Faxes
(Printers for Windows 2000) folder. The copy time varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
Close My Network Places.
4. Print a test page to verify installation.
a. Click start® Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
b. Select the printer you just created.
c. Click File® Properties.
d. From the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1. On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click start® Network.
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4. Click Install driver.
5. Click Continue in User Account Control dialog.
6. Wait for the driver information to copy from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers folder. The time
this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
7. Print a test page to verify installation.
a. Click start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound.
b. Select Printers.
c. Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.
d. From the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1. On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click start® Network.
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4. Click Install driver.
5. Wait for the driver information to copy from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers folder. The time
this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
6. Print a test page to verify installation.
a. Click start® Control Panel.
b. Select Printers.
c. Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.
d. From the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition
1. On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click Start® your user name® Network (Start® Network for Windows Server 2008 R2).
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4. Click Install driver.
5. Wait for the driver information to copy from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Devices and Printers
folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
6. Print a test page to verify installation.
a. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
b. Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.
c. From the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Peer-to-Peer
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is fully installed on each client computer. Network clients retain control of driver modifications. The client computer
handles the print job processing.
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000
1. Click start® Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
2. Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Click Next.
4. Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and then click Next (For Windows 2000, select the network printer from the Shared
printers list). If the printer is not listed, type in the path of the printer in the text box.
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation
process.
5. Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next (For Windows 2000, click OK).
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will need to provide a path to available drivers.
6. Select whether you want this printer to be the default printer for the client, click Next, and then click Finish (For Windows 2000, click Finish).
7. Print a test page to verify installation:
a. Click start® Settings® Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
b. Select the printer you just created.
c. Click File® Properties.
d. From the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1. Click start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers.
2. Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I
want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation
process.
4. If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will need to provide a path to available drivers.
5. Select whether you want this printer to be the default printer for the client, click Next.
6. If you want to verify installation then click Print a test page.
7. Click Finish.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1. Click start® Control Panel® Printers.
2. Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I
want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation
process.
4. If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will need to provide a path to available drivers.
5. Select whether you want this printer to be the default printer for the client, click Next.
6. If you want to verify installation then click Print a test page.
7. Click Finish.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition
1. Click Start® Devices and Printers.
2. Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed.
Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the printer in the text box, and then click Next.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation
process.
4. If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will need to provide the path to the available drivers.
5. Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.
6. Select whether you want this printer to be the default printer for the client.
7. If you want to verify installation then click Print a test page.
8. Click Finish.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Setup Security
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then press
4. Panel Lock is displayed. Press
5. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button until Enable is highlighted, and then press
6. Enter the new password, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
7. Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then press
(Set) button.
The password has been changed.
NOTE: If you forget your password, turn off the printer. Then, while holding Menu button, turn on the printer. Perform steps 2 to 7 to reset the password. This will
recover the factory default panel password.
NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, follow the following steps. Perform steps 1 and 2. Press
highlighted, and then press
button until Change Password is
(Set) button. Perform steps 6 and 7 to change the password. This will change the password.
NOTE: If Panel Lock is Enable, the factory-default panel password is 0000.
Panel Lock
Change Password
Disable*
Does not lock Admin Menu with a password.
Enable
Locks Admin Menu with a password.
0000*
0000-9999
Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu.
Troubleshooting Instructions
Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters, except the parameters for the network, are reset to their default values.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
4. Press
until Reset Defaults is highlighted, and then press
5. Press
until Start is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
6. Turn off the printer to apply the settings.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reset Defaults page is displayed.
5. Click Start.
The printer is turned off automatically to apply the settings.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Install the PPD File on Macintosh Computers
Installing the PPD File
The PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file describes print features and capabilities (such as paper sources, paper sizes,
and duplexing) of a particular printer. To print data on Macintosh computers, the PostScript driver uses this data to
command the printer properly.
Installing the PPD File
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer.
2. Launch the Drivers and Utilities CD.
3. Double-click the Mac OS X folder, and then double-click the Dell 5130cdn Installer icon.
4. Type the administrator's name and password, and then click OK.
5. Read the Dell software license agreement, and then click Continue.
6. Click Agree.
7. Select Easy Install, and then click Install.
8. Click Quit.
Installation is complete.
9. Go to the next section to continue.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s)
When Using a USB Connection
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.
3. Start System Preferences.
4. Click Print and Fax, and then click +.
5. Click Default and select the printer that is connected via USB connection. Then, click Add.
When Using IP Printing
NOTE: A network printer adapter must be installed to select IP. Refer to the User's Guide available on the Drivers
and Utilities CD or support.dell.com for installation instructions.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
NOTE: The Macintosh computer must be connected to the network in advance.
3. Start Systems Preferences.
4. Click Print and Fax, and then click +.
5. Select IP from the menu.
6. Type the IP address of the printer being used in the Address area and select Line Printer Daemon - LPD from
Protocol.
7. Select Select a driver to use... from Print Using and select Dell 5130cdn Color Laser from the list.
NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to
specify it.
8. Click Add.
9. Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.
10. Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.
When Using Bonjour
NOTE: A network protocol adapter must be installed and the IP addresses for the Macintosh computer and the
printer must have the same segment to use Bonjour.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
NOTE: The Macintosh computer must be connected to the network in advance.
3. Start Systems Preferences.
4. Click Print and Fax, and then click +.
5. Click Default and select the printer that is connected via the Bonjour connection. Then, click Add.
6. Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.
7. Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4
When Using a USB Connection
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.
3. Start the Printer Setup Utility, and then click Add from the Printer List dialog box.
4. Click Default Browser and select your printer from the Printer List.
5. Your printer model is automatically selected for Printer Model.
6. Select USB from the menu, and then select your printer from the list.
7. Click Add.
When Using IP Printing
1. Click IP Printer on the Printer Browser dialog box, and select Line Printer Daemon - LPD from the Protocol
menu.
2. Type the IP address for the printer being used to Address in the Protocol menu.
3. Select Dell from Print Using, and confirm Dell 5130cdn Color Laser is selected for the Model Name.
NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to
specify it.
4. Click Add.
When Using Bonjour
NOTE: A network protocol adapter must be installed and the IP addresses for the Macintosh computer and the
printer must have the same segment to use Bonjour.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
NOTE: The Macintosh computer must be connected to the network in advance.
3. Start the Printer Setup Utility, and click Add from the Printer List dialog box.
4. Click Default Browser on the Printer Browser dialog box and select the printer that is connected via the Bonjour
connection. Then, click Add.
5. Specify the options to have been installed to the printer, and then click Continue.
6. Confirm that the printer is displayed on the Printer List dialog box.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.3 or Earlier Version(s)
1. Turn on the printer.
2. If you use the USB port, connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.
3. Start Printer Setup Utility. The Printer List screen appears.
NOTE: When using Mac OS X 10.3 or later, you can find the Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in
Applications.
4. Click Add.
When Using USB
1. Select USB from the menu, and then select your printer from the list.
2. For Mac OS X 10.3 or later, your printer model is automatically selected for Printer Model.
3. Click Add.
When Using IP Printing
1. Select IP Printing from the menu, and type the IP address for the printer being used in Printer Address.
2. Select Printer Type from the menu, and select LPD/LPR.
3. Select Dell from Printer Model, and confirm Dell 5130cdn Color Laser is selected for the Model Name. If it is
not selected, select it.
NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to
specify it.
4. Click Add.
When Using Rendezvous
NOTE: A network protocol adapter must be installed and the IP addresses for the Macintosh computer and the
printer must have the same segment to use Rendezvous.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
NOTE: The Macintosh computer must be connected to the network in advance.
3. Start the Printer Setup Utility, and click Add from the Printer List dialog box.
4. Select Rendezvous from the menu, and select your printer from the list.
5. Select Dell from Printer Model, and select Dell 5130cdn Color Laser.
Then click Add.
6. Confirm that the printer is displayed on the Printer List dialog box.
Configure Settings
All the optional accessories are verified as installed.
Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s)
1. Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2. Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3. Select Driver, and select the options that have been installed in the printers, and then click OK.
Mac OS X 10.3 or 10.4
1. Start the Printer Setup Utility.
2. On the Printer List dialog box, select the printer to be configured.
3. Click Show Info.
4. Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed on the printer, then click Apply
Changes.
NOTE: You must configure the print queue that was automatically created on a non-English version of Mac OS X
10.3 when a USB cable is connected to your computer.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Overview
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Page Display Format
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Overview
NOTE: This web tool is not available unless the printer is connected to a network using a network cable or the
wireless adapter.
One of the features of the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool is E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends an e-mail to you or
the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer
Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Just enter the IP address of each printer on the
network to display the asset tag number.
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of
printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can easily copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the
network using your web browser.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type your printer's IP address in your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the printer settings page or display the TCP/IP settings page,
which lists the IP address.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Printer Settings is displayed. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your
printer, see "Assign an IP Address."
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on the printer supply status. When a toner cartridge is running
low, click the order supplies link on the first screen to order an additional toner cartridge.
Printer Jobs
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to change printer settings and view the settings in the operator panel remotely.
Print Server Settings
Using the Print Server Settings menu, you can change the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for
communications.
Copy Printer Settings
Use the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer settings and the ColorTrack settings to another printer or
printers on the network just by typing each printer's IP address.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Print Volume
Use the Print Volume option to check the histories of printing, such as paper usage and types of jobs being printed, and
limit which users use the color mode and the maximum number of pages they can print by setting the internal or external
certification.
Printer Information
Use the Printer Information menu to get the information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status of current
memory and engine code levels.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to get the information about the paper type and size for each tray.
E-Mail Alert
Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention. Type your name or the
key operator's name in the
e-mail list box to be notified.
Set Password
Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do
not inadvertently change the printer settings you selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Online Help
Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support website.
Order Supplies at:
www.dell.com/supplies
Contact Dell Support at:
support.dell.com
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web browser before using the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if the pages were
configured by the language different from your web browser's.
Setting Up From Web Browser
It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel before
using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For Internet Explorer® 6.0, Internet Explorer 7.0, Internet Explorer 8.0
Setting Up the Display Language
1. Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2. Select Languages in the General tab.
3. Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
For example:
Italian (Italy) [it-IT]
Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]
German (Germany) [de-DE]
French (France) [fr-FR]
English (United States) [en-us]
Danish [da-DK]
Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]
Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]
Swedish [sv-SE]
Setting the Printer's IP Address to Non-Proxy
1. Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2. Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections tab.
3. Do either of the following:
Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.
Click Advanced, and then specify the printer's IP address in the Do not use proxy server for addresses
beginning with field under Exceptions.
After setting the language and proxy, type <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the printer's IP address) in the URL entry field
of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For Firefox 2.0 or Later
Setting Up the Display Language
1. Select Options from the Tools menu.
2. Click Advanced.
3. When you use Firefox 2.0, click Choose in the General tab. When you use Firefox 3.0, click Choose in the
Content tab.
4. Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in order of preference list.
For example:
English [en] or English/United States [en-us]
Italian [it]
Spanish [es]
German [de]
French [fr]
Dutch [nl]
Norwegian [no]
Swedish [sv]
Danish [da]
Setting the Printer's IP Address to Non-Proxy
1. Select Options from the Tools menu.
2. Click Advanced tab.
3. Click Network on the Options dialog box.
4. Click Connection ® Settings.
5. When you use Firefox 2.0, do one of the following:
Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box.
Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.
Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter the printer's IP address in the No Proxy
for edit box.
Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.
When you use Firefox 3.0, do the following:
Select the No Proxy check box, if you don't want to use a proxy.
Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.
Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter a hostname and a port number if you
have a list of one or more proxy servers. If you have an IP address that will not be proxied, enter the
printer's IP address in the No Proxy for edit box.
Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.
After setting the language and proxy, type <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the printer's IP address) in the URL entry field
of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Setting Up From Operator Panel
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to Enable (the factory default) on the
operator panel. Confirm the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For
more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus".
Page Display Format
The layout of the page is divided into three sections mentioned below:
Top Frame
The Top Frame is located at the top of all pages. When Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the current
status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the Top Frame on every page.
The following items are displayed in the Top Frame.
1
Dell 5130cdn
Color Laser
Displays the printer's product name.
2 IP Address
Displays the printer's IP address.
3 Location
Displays the printer's location. The location can be changed in Basic Information on the Print
Server Settings page.
4 Contact Person
Displays the name of the printer's administrator. The name can be changed in the Basic
Information on the Print Server Settings page.
5 Event Panel
Displays the condition of the printer. If the error occurs, the message is indicated as "error
code"+":"+"message". For example, 077-090:Paper jam. Open...
6 Printer Bitmap
Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the Right Frame
when you click the image.
Left Frame
The Left Frame is located at the left side of all pages. The menu titles displayed in the Left Frame are linked to
corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.
The following menus are displayed in the Left Frame.
1
Printer Status
Links to the Printer Status menu.
2
Printer Jobs
Links to the Printer Jobs menu.
3
Printer Settings
Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.
4
Print Server Settings
Links to the Print Server Reports menu.
5
Copy Printer Settings
Links to the Copy Printer Settings menu.
6
Print Volume
Links to the Print Volume menu.
7
Printer Information
Links to the Printer Status menu.
8
Tray Settings
Links to the Tray Settings menu.
9
E-Mail Alert
Links to the Print Server Settings menu.
10 Set Password
Links to the Security menu.
11 Online Help
Links to the Dell Support website.
12 Order Supplies at:
Links to the Dell web page.
13 Contact Dell Support at: Links to the Dell support page web address: support.dell.com/
Right Frame
The Right Frame is located at the right side of all pages. The contents of the Right Frame correspond to the menu that
you select in the Left Frame. For details on the items displayed in the Right Frame, see "Details of the Menu Items."
Buttons in the Right Frame
1 Refresh Button
Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the Right Frame.
2
Apply New
Settings Button
Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The
old printer settings will be replaced by the new settings.
3
Restore Settings
Button
Restores the old settings from before changes made. New settings will not be submitted to the
printer.
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you are
accessing these menus, the authentication dialog appears on the screen. Type a user name and password for the printer's
administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in the
Set Password page in the Security menu. The user name cannot be changed. For more information, see "Set
Password."
Details of the Menu Items
"Printer Status"
"Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"
"Job List"
"Printer Jobs"
"Completed Jobs"
"Printer Settings Report"
"Menu Settings"
"Reports"
"System Settings"
"Parallel Settings"
"Network Settings"
"Printer Settings"
"USB Settings"
"PCL Settings"
"PS Settings"
"Security"
"Paper Density"
"Adjust BTR"
"Printer Settings"
"Adjust Fuser"
"Auto Registration Adjustment"
"Color Registration Adjustments"
"Printer Maintenance"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Reset Defaults"
"Storage"* 1
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Initialize PrintMeter"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"
"Print Server Setup Page"
"Print Server Reports"
"NetWare Setup Page"
"E-Mail Alert Setup Page"
"Basic Information"
"Port Settings"
"TCP/IP"
"NetWare"
"Print Server Settings"
"E-Mail Alert"
"Bonjour (mDNS)"
"SNMP"
"Print Server Settings"
"Wireless LAN"* 2
"Reset Print Server"
"Set Password"
"Authentication System"
"Kerberos Server"
"LDAP Server"
"Security"
"LDAP Authentication"
"SSL/TLS"
"IPsec"
"802.1x"* 3
"IP Filter"
"Copy Printer Settings"
"Copy Printer Settings"
"Copy Printer Settings Report"
"Print Volume"
"Print Volume"
"Dell ColorTrack"
"Tray Settings"
* 1 This item is available only when the RAM disk is on or the optional hard disk is installed.
* 2 This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wireless network.
* 3 This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wired network.
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status
Purpose:
To check the status of the consumables and trays.
Values:
Cyan Toner Cartridge
Level
Magenta Toner
Cartridge Level
Yellow Toner Cartridge
Level
Displays the percent of toner remaining in each toner cartridge. When a cartridge is empty,
a message appears. The text Call or Order is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies website.
Black Toner Cartridge
Level
OK
Consumables
Status
Indicates that the status of the drum cartridge, staple cartridge and/or waste toner box is
OK for use.
Indicates that the status of the drum cartridge, staple cartridge and/or waste toner box
Replace
needs to be replaced soon. The text Call or Order is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies
Soon
website.
Indicates that the status of the drum cartridge, staple cartridge and/or waste toner box
Replace
needs to be replaced now. The text Call or Order is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies
Now
website.
???
Indicates that the non-Dell toner cartridges are installed.
-
Indicates that the drum cartridge or staple cartridge is not installed.
OK
Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is unknown.
Paper
Status Low
Paper
Trays
Indicates that paper is running low in the tray.
Add
Paper
Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
Capacity
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Size
Displays the size of paper in the tray.
OK
Output Status
Full
Tray
Capacity
Cover
Status
Indicates that the tray is available.
Indicates that the tray is not available.
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Closed
Indicates that the cover is closed.
Open
Indicates that the cover is open.
Printer Type
Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.
Printing Speed
Displays the printer's printing speed.
Printer Events
Purpose:
When faults such as Out of Paper or Front Cover is Open occur, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are
displayed in the Printer Events page.
Values:
Location Displays the location where the error occurred.
Details
Displays the details of the error.
Printer Information
Purpose:
To verify the printer details such as the hardware configuration and software version. This page can also be displayed by
clicking Printer Information in the Left Frame.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number
Displays Dell's service tag number.
Asset Tag Number
Displays the printer's asset tag number.
Printer Serial Number
Displays the printer's serial number.
Memory Capacity
Displays the memory capacity.
Hard Disk* 1
Displays information on the printer's hard disk.
Processor Speed
Displays the processing speed.
Printer Revision Levels
Firmware Version
Displays the revision date (revision level).
Network Firmware Version Displays the revision date (revision level).
* 1 This item is available only when the optional hard disk drive is installed.
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the details
of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs.
Job List
Purpose:
To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.
Values:
ID
Displays the job ID.
Job Name
Displays the file name of the job being printed.
Owner
Displays the job owner's name.
Host Name
Displays the name of the host computer.
Job Status
Displays the status of the job being printed.
Host I/F
Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date the print job was submitted.
Completed Jobs
Purpose:
To check the completed jobs. Maximum of last 22 print jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.
Values:
ID
Displays the job ID.
Job Name
Displays the file name of the job.
Owner
Displays the job owner's name.
Host Name
Displays the name of the host computer.
Output Result
Displays the status of the job.
Impression Number Displays the job's total number of job pages.
No. of Sheets
Displays the job's total job sheets.
Host I/F
Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date the job was submitted.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to configure the printer settings.
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the Right Frame.
Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of the operator panel menus.
Values:
System
Settings
Power Saver
Time-Sleep
Displays the time for transition to the power saver mode (Sleep).
Power Saver
Time-Deep
Sleep
Displays the time for transition to the power saver mode (Deep Sleep).
Control Panel
Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when the operator panel input is correct. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.
Invalid Key
Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.
Machine Ready
Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when the printer becomes ready. Off indicates
that the tone is disabled.
Job Completed
Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when a print job is complete. Off indicates that
the tone is disabled.
Fault Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when a job ends abnormally. Off indicates that
the tone is disabled.
Alert Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.
Out of Paper
Alert Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates
that the tone is disabled.
Low Toner
Alert Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when toner or some other consumable is low. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.
Base Tone
Displays whether to emit the tone when the operator panel screen is returned to
the default by scrolling the loop menu. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Fault Time-Out
Displays the amount of time the printer cancels for a job stops abnormally.
Job Time-Out
Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
Panel
Language
Displays the language used on the operator panel screen.
Auto Log Print
Displays whether to automatically output a log of completed jobs.
Print ID
Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper.
Print Text
Displays whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data, which
is not supported by the printer, as text when the printer receives it.
Banner Sheet
Insert Position
Displays where to insert a banner sheet.
Banner Sheet
Specify Tray
Displays which input tray to use to insert a banner sheet.
RAM Disk* 1
Displays the amount of memory allocated for the file system, Secure Print and Proof
Print features.
Substitute Tray
Displays whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the
specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
mm / inch
Displays the measurement unit used on the operator panel screen.
Letterhead
Duplex Mode
Displays whether to duplex print for letter head paper.
Low Toner
Alert Msg
Displays whether to show the message when the toner is short.
Job Offset* 2
Displays whether to offset the position of the output paper.
Banner Sheet
Offset* 2
Displays whether to insert the banner sheet per offset output paper.
Job Offset of
Staple* 2
Displays whether to staple per offset output paper.
Stapler Cart.
Empty* 2
Displays whether to continue the print job when the stapler cartridge is empty.
Parallel Port
Displays whether the parallel interface is enabled.
Parallel
Settings
Network
Settings
USB Settings
PCL Settings
PS Settings
Secure
Settings
ECP
Displays the ECP communication mode of the parallel interface.
Adobe™
Protocol
Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
Adobe Protocol Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
USB Port
Displays whether the USB interface is enabled.
Adobe Protocol Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
Paper Tray
Displays the paper tray setting.
Paper Size
Displays the paper size setting.
Custom Size Y
Displays the length of custom size paper.
Custom Size X
Displays the width of custom size paper.
Orientation
Displays how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
2 Sided
Displays whether to do duplexing as the default for all print jobs.
Font
Displays the selected font from the list of registered fonts.
Symbol Set
Displays a symbol set for the specified font.
Font Size
Displays the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch
Displays the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Form Line
Displays the number of characters in a line.
Quantity
Displays the number of copies to print.
Image
Enhancement
Displays whether the Image Enhancement feature is enabled.
Hex Dump
Displays whether the Hex Dump feature is enabled.
Draft Mode
Displays whether to print in the draft mode.
Line
Termination
Displays whether to set the line termination.
Default Color
Displays the color mode setting.
PS Error
Report
Displays whether the printer outputs error contents for a PostScript error.
PS Job TimeOut
Displays the execution time for one PostScript job.
Paper Select
Mode
Displays the tray that is selected in the PostScript printing.
Default Color
Displays the color mode setting.
Panel Lock Set
Displays whether to lock Admin Menu with a password.
Login ErrorAttempts
Displays the maximum number that the administrator fails to log in.
Encryption
Displays whether to encrypt the data.
Set Available
Time
Displays whether to set the time period when printing is available.
Start Time
Displays the start time of the time period when printing is available.
End Time
Displays the end time of the time period when printing is available.
Recurrence
Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting.
HDD Overwrite
Mode* 3
Displays whether to overwrite the hard disk drive.
Expiration
Mode* 4
Displays whether to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the
RAM disk or the hard disk drive.
Paper Density
Adjust BTR
Adjust Fuser
Expiration
Time* 4
Displays the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the
hard disk drive.
Recurrence* 4
Displays the period to repeat the setting.
Weekly
Settings* 4
Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Monthly
Settings* 4
Displays the day of the month to repeat the setting.
Plain
Displays the paper density of plain paper.
Label
Displays the paper density of labels.
Plain
(60 to 90 gsm)
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for plain paper.
Plain Thick
(80/90 to 105
gsm)
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for thick plain
paper.
Transparency
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for transparencies.
Covers
(106 to 163
gsm)
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for cover paper.
Covers Thick
(164 to 216
gsm)
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for thick cover
paper.
Label
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for labels.
Coated
(106 to 163
gsm)
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for coated paper.
Coated Thick
(164 to 216
gsm)
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for thick coated
paper.
Envelope
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for envelopes.
Recycled
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (from -6 to 6) for recycled paper.
Plain
(60 to 90 gsm)
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for plain paper.
Plain Thick
(80/90 to 105
gsm)
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for thick plain paper.
Transparency
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for transparency.
Covers
(106 to 163
gsm)
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for cover paper.
Covers Thick
(164 to 216
gsm)
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for thick cover paper.
Label
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for labels.
Coated
(106 to 163
gsm)
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for coated paper.
Coated Thick
(164 to 216
gsm)
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for thick coated paper.
Envelope
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for envelopes.
Recycled
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (from -6 to 6) for recycled paper.
Auto Registration Adjustment
Displays whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Adjust Altitude
Displays the altitude of where the printer is located.
Non-Dell Toner
Displays whether or not to use another manufacturer's toner cartridge.
Date Format
Displays the default date format.
Time Format
Displays the default time format; 12 Hour Clock or 24 Hour Clock.
Clock Settings Time Zone
Set Date
Displays the date setting.
Set Time
Displays the time setting.
Select Reorder
URL
Displays a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order
Supplies at: in the Left Frame.
Web Link
Regular
Customization
Dell
ColorTrack
Tray Settings
Displays the default time zone.
Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be
linked to Order Supplies at:.
Premier
Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order
Supplies at:.
ColorTrack
Mode
Displays whether to enable the ColorTrack.
No Account
User Print
Displays whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information.
ColorTrack
Error Report
Displays whether to print the error report on the ColorTrack mode.
Tray 1 Paper
Type
Displays the paper type setting of the first tray from the top.
Tray 1 Paper
Size
Displays the paper size setting of the first tray from the top.
Tray 1 Custom
Size - Y
Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the first tray from the top.
Tray 1 Custom
Size - X
Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the first tray from the top.
Tray 2 Paper
Type*5
Displays the paper type setting of the second tray from the top.
Tray 2 Paper
Size* 5
Displays the paper size setting of the second tray from the top.
Tray 2 Custom
Size - Y* 5
Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the second tray from the top.
Tray 2 Custom
Size - X* 5
Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the second tray from the top.
Tray 3 Paper
Type* 5
Displays the paper type setting of the third tray from the top.
Tray 3 Paper
Size* 5
Displays the paper size setting of the third tray from the top.
Tray 3 Custom
Size - Y* 5
Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the third tray from the top.
Tray 3 Custom
Size - X* 5
Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the third tray from the top.
Tray 4 Paper
Type* 6
Displays the paper type setting of the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 4 Paper
Size* 6
Displays the paper size setting of the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 4 Custom
Size - Y* 6
Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 4 Custom
Size - X* 6
Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Tray Settings
Tray 5 Paper
Type* 6
Displays the paper type setting of the fifth tray from the top.
Tray 5 Paper
Size* 6
Displays the paper size setting of the fifth tray from the top.
Tray 5 Custom
Size - Y* 6
Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
Tray 5 Custom
Size - X* 6
Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
MPF Mode
Displays the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder
(MPF).
Display
Popup* 7
Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is
loaded in the MPF.
MPF Paper
Type* 7
Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.
MPF Paper
Size* 7
Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.
MPF Custom
Size - Y* 7
Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom
Size - X* 7
Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
* 1 This item is available only when the optional memory module is installed, and also when the optional hard disk is not
installed.
* 2 This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
* 3 This item is available only when the optional hard disk is installed.
* 4 This item is available only when the RAM disk is on or the optional hard disk is installed.
* 5 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder or 1100-sheet feeder is installed.
* 6 This item is available only when the optional 1100-sheet feeder is installed.
* 7 This item is displayed only when Panel Specified is selected for MPF Mode.
Reports
Purpose:
To print various types of reports and lists.
Values:
Printer Settings
Click the Start button to print the printer settings page.
Panel Settings
Click the Start button to print the panel settings page.
PCL Fonts List
Click the Start button to print the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) Fonts List.
PCL Macro List
Click the Start button to print the PCL Macro List.
Job History
Click the Start button to print the Job History report.
Error History
Click the Start button to print the Error History report.
PS Fonts List
Click the Start button to print the PS Fonts List.
Print Meter
Click the Start button to print the Print Meter report.
Color Test Page
Click the Start button to print the Color Test Page.
Stored Document* 1 Click the Start button to print the Stored Document list.
* 1 This item is available only when the RAM disk is on or the optional hard disk is installed.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings, Parallel Settings, Network Settings, USB Settings, PCL
Settings, PS Settings, and Secure Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic printer settings.
Values:
Power Saver
Time-Sleep
Sets the time for transition to the power saver mode (Sleep).
Power Saver
Time-Deep Sleep
Sets the time for transition to the power saver mode (Deep Sleep).
Control Panel
Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct.
Invalid Key Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect.
Machine Ready
Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready.
Job Completed
Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when a print job is complete.
Fault Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally.
Alert Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs.
Out of Paper
Alert Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper.
Low Toner Alert
Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when toner or some other consumable is low.
Base Tone
Specifies whether to enable the tone that is emitted when the operator panel screen returns to the
default by scrolling the loop menu.
Fault Time-Out
Specifies in seconds the amount of time the printer should cancel for a job stops abnormally. The
print job is cancelled if the time-out time is exceeded.
Job Time-Out
Specifies in seconds the amount of time the printer should wait for data to arrive from the
computer. The print job is cancelled if the time-out time is exceeded.
Panel Language
Sets the language to be used on the operator panel.
Auto Log Print
Specifies whether to automatically print a log of completed jobs after every 20 jobs.
Print ID
Specifies where to print the user ID on the output paper.
Print Text
Specifies whether the printer outputs PDL data, which is not supported by the printer, as text
when the printer receives it.
Banner Sheet
Insert Position
Specifies where to insert a banner sheet.
Banner Sheet
Specify Tray
Specifies which input tray to use to insert a banner sheet.
RAM Disk* 1
Specifies the amount of memory allocated for the file system, Secure Print and Proof Print
features.
Substitute Tray
Specifies whether or not to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the specified
tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
mm / inch
Specifies the measurement unit to be used on the operator panel screen as either mm or inches.
Letterhead
Specifies that duplex printing is selected for two-sided letterhead media.
Duplex Mode
Low Toner Alert
Msg
Specifies whether to show the message when the toner is short.
Job Offset* 2
Specifies whether to offset the position of the output paper.
Banner Sheet
Offset*2
Specifies whether to put the banner sheet per offset print.
Job Offset of
Staple* 2
Specifies whether to staple the offset print.
Stapler Cart.
Empty* 2
Specifies whether to continue the print job when the stapler cartridge is empty.
* 1 This item is available only when the optional memory module is installed, and also when the optional hard disk is not
installed.
* 2 This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
Parallel Settings
Purpose:
To configure the parallel interface.
Values:
Parallel Port
Specifies whether to enable the parallel interface.
ECP
Specifies whether to enable the ECP communication mode of the parallel interface.
Adobe Protocol Specifies PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
Network Settings
Purpose:
To Specify the PostScript communication protocol for this printer.
Values:
Adobe Protocol Specifies PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
USB Settings
Purpose:
To change printer settings affecting a USB port.
Values:
USB Port
Specifies whether to enable the USB interface.
Adobe Protocol Specifies PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
PCL Settings
Purpose:
To change the printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.
Values:
Paper Tray
Specifies the input tray.
Paper Size
Specifies the paper size.
Custom Size
-Y
Specifies the length of custom size paper.
Custom Size
-X
Specifies the width of custom size paper.
Orientation
Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
2 Sided
Sets duplexing as the default for all print jobs. This item is available only when the duplexer is
installed.
Font
Specifies the font from the list of registered fonts.
Symbol Set
Specifies a symbol set for the specified font.
Font Size
Specifies the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Form Line
Specifies the number of characters in a line.
Quantity
Sets the number of copies to print.
Image
Specifies whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Enhancement
Hex Dump
Specifies whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data
sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not
executed.
Draft Mode
Specifies whether to print in the draft mode.
Line
Termination
Specifies how to handle line terminations.
Default Color
Specifies the print color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for print jobs without a specified
color print mode.
PS Settings
Purpose:
To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript emulation printer language.
Values:
PS Error Report
Specifies whether the printer outputs error contents for a PostScript error.
PS Job Time-Out
Specifies the execution time for one PostScript job.
Paper Select Mode Specifies the way to select the tray for the PostScript mode.
Default Color
Specifies the default color mode for the PostScript mode.
Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To set whether to lock Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Panel Lock Set
Sets whether to lock Admin Menu with a password.
New Password
Sets a password that is required to access Admin Menu.
Re-enter Password
Enter the new password again to confirm.
Login Error - Attempts Sets the maximum number that the administrator fails to log in.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When changing the password for the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the Left Frame and set the password.
Data Encryption
Purpose:
To set whether to encrypt the data.
Values:
Encryption
Data Encryption Encryption Key
Sets whether to encrypt the data.
Sets a key that is required to encrypt.
Re-enter Encryption Key Enter the new key again to confirm.
NOTE: You can enter only characters from 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, and NULL values for encryption key.
Set Available Time
Purpose:
To set the time to enable the secure setting.
Values:
Set Available Time Specifies whether to set the time period when printing is available.
Start Time
Specifies the start time of the time period when printing is available.
End Time
Specifies the end time of the time period when printing is available.
Recurrence
Specifies the day of the week to repeat the setting.
HDD Overwrite Mode
Purpose:
To set whether to overwrite the hard disk drive.
Values:
HDD Overwrite Mode Sets whether to overwrite the hard disk drive.
Secure Job Expiration
Purpose:
To set the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk drive.
Values:
Expiration
Mode
Sets whether to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard
disk drive.
Expiration
Time
Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk drive.
Recurrence
Sets the period to repeat the setting.
Weekly
Settings
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Monthly
Settings
Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab includes Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust Fuser, Auto Registration Adjustment,
Color Registration Adjustments, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Storage, Non-Dell Toner, Initialize
PrintMeter, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain
Sets the density of plain paper to Light or Normal.
Label Sets the density of labels to Light or Normal.
Adjust BTR
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller (BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative
values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTICE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain
(60 to 90 gsm)
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of -6 to
6.
Plain Thick
(80/90 to 105
gsm)
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range of 6 to 6.
Transparency
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for transparencies within the range of -6
to 6.
Covers
(106 to 163 gsm)
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of -6 to
6.
Covers Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick cover paper within the range of 6 to 6.
Label
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of -6 to 6.
Coated
(106 to 163 gsm)
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of -6 to
6.
Coated Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick coated paper within the range of
-6 to 6.
Envelope
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of -6 to 6.
Recycled
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range of -6
to 6.
Adjust Fuser
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To lower the temperature, set negative values. To
increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower the
temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain
(60 to 90 gsm)
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for plain paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Plain Thick
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick plain paper within the range of -6 to 6.
(80/90 to 105 gsm)
Transparency
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for transparencies within the range of -6 to 6.
Covers
(106 to 163 gsm)
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for cover paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Covers Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick cover paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Label
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for labels within the range of -6 to 6.
Coated
(106 to 163 gsm)
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for coated paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Coated Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick coated paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Envelope
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for envelopes within the range of -6 to 6.
Recycled
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for recycled paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Auto Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Color Registration Adjustments
Purpose:
To specify whether to manually perform color registration adjustment.
Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required such as when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is
moved.
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustments feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is
set to Off.
Values:
Auto
Correct
Click Start to Automatically performs color registration correction.
Color
Regi
Chart
Click Start to print a color registration chart. The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow,
magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next to the straightest lines
for each of the three colors. If the value for the straightest line is 0, color registration adjustment is not
required. If the value for the straightest line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under
Color Registration Adjustments.
Enter
Specifies lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for LeftYellow,
Number LeftMagenta, LeftCyan, RightYellow, RightMagenta and RightCyan.
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of where the printer is located because it affects print quality.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed
by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize the NV (non-volatile) memory. After executing this function to automatically restart the printer and rebooting
the printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
Values:
Reset Defaults and restart printer Click Start to reset the default setting and restart the printer.
Power On Wizard
Click Start to start the power on wizard and perform initial setup.
Storage
Purpose:
To clear all files stored in the RAM disk or the optional hard disk, or format the optional hard disk.
Values:
Clear
Storage* 1
Format
HDD*2
All Clear
Click Start to clear all files that are stored as Secure Print and Proof Print in the RAM disk
or the optional hard disk.
Secure
Document
Click Start to clear all files that are stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the optional
hard disk.
Stored
Document
Click Start to clear all files that are stored in the RAM disk or the optional hard disk.
Click Start to format the optional hard disk. All fonts, forms and files for Secure Print and Proof Print
stored in the optional hard disk are cleared.
* 1 This item is available only when the RAM disk is on or the optional hard disk is installed.
* 2 This item is available only when the optional hard disk is installed.
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To specify whether or not to use another manufacturer's tone cartridge.
NOTE: Before you use another manufacture's toner cartridge, be sure to restart the printer.
NOTICE: Use of a non-Dell toner cartridge may result in some of the printer's functions to be unavailable, a
reduction in print quality, or deterioration of printer's reliability. Use of a new Dell brand toner cartridge is
recommended for your printer. The Dell warranty does not cover any problems caused by the use of any accessory,
part, or component that is not supplied by Dell.
Initialize PrintMeter
Purpose:
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.
Clock Settings
To specify the clock settings.
Values:
Date Format Specifies the date format; yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or dd/mm/yy.
Time Format Specifies the time format; 12 Hour Clock or 24 Hour Clock.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone.
Set Date
Specifies the current date.
Set Time
Specifies the current time.
Web Link Customization
Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the Left Frame.
Values:
Select Reorder
URL
Select the Regular or Premier URL to be linked to Order Supplies at:.
Regular
Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order
Supplies at:.
Premier
Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for communications.
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the Right Frame.
Print Server Reports
The Print Server Reports tab includes Print Server Setup Page, NetWare Setup Page, and E-Mail Alert Setup
Page.
Print Server Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports. On this page,
you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server
Settings tab.
Values:
Ethernet* 1
Wireless
Settings* 2
Ethernet Settings
Displays the current settings of Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex
settings.
Current Ethernet
Settings
Displays the current Ethernet settings.
MAC Address
Displays the printer's MAC address.
SSID
Displays the name that identifies the network.
Network Type
Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure mode.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the wireless adapter.
Link Channel
Displays the channel number of the connection.
Link Quality
Displays the quality of the connection.
IP Mode
Displays the IP mode.
Host Name
Displays the host name.
IP Address Mode Displays the IP address mode.
IP Address
Displays the IP address.
IPv4* 3
TCP/IP
Settings
IPv6* 4
IPv4* 3
IPv6* 4
DNS
LPD
Port9100
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask.
Gateway
Address
Displays the gateway address.
Enable Stateless
Address
Displays whether to enable the stateless address.
Use Manual
Address
Displays whether to set the IP address manually.
Manual
Address* 5
Displays the IP address.
Stateless
Address 1-3* 6
Displays the stateless addresses.
Link Local
Address* 6
Displays the link local address.
Manual Gateway
Address* 5
Displays the gateway address.
Auto Configure
Gateway
Address* 6
Displays the gateway address.
Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCP
Displays whether to automatically get a DNS (Domain Name
System) server address from the DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server.
Current DNS
Server Address
Displays the DNS server address.
Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCPv6-lite
Displays whether to automatically get a DNS server address
from the DHCPv6-lite server.
Current DNS
Server Address
Displays the DNS server address.
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv4)
Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic Update feature.
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv6)
Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic Update feature.
Auto Generate
Search List
Displays whether to automatically generate a search list.
Search Domain
Name
Displays the search domain name.
Time-out
Displays the time-out period.
Priority to IPv6
DNS Name
Resolution* 7
Displays whether to use the DNS Name Resolution feature.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Connection TimeDisplays the connection time-out period.
Out
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Port Number
Displays the port number.
Connection TimeDisplays the connection time-out period.
Out
IPP
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Printer URI
Displays the printer URI.
Connection TimeDisplays the connection time-out period.
Out
Port Number
Displays the port number.
WSD
FTP
HTTP
Maximum
Sessions
Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the
client.
Port Status
Displays the WSD port status.
Port Number
Displays the WSD port number.
Receive TimeOut
Displays the receive time-out period.
Notification
Time-Out
Displays the notification time-out period.
Maximum
Number of TTL
Displays the maximum number of TTLs.
Maximum
Number of
Notification
Displays the maximum number of notifications.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Connection TimeDisplays the connection time-out period.
Out
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Port Number
Displays the port number.
Simultaneous
Connections
Displays the number of connections received simultaneously by the client.
Connection TimeDisplays the connection time-out period.
Out
Bonjour
(mDNS)
Telnet
SNMP
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Host Name
Displays the host name.
Printer Name
Displays the printer name.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Connection TimeDisplays the connection time-out period.
Out
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Enable SNMP
v1/v2c Protocol
Displays the status of the SNMP v1/v2c feature.
Enable SNMP v3
Protocol
Displays the status of the SNMP v3 feature.
Authentication Authentication
System
System Settings
SSL/TLS
IPsec Settings
802.1x* 1
Displays the authentication method.
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication
Displays the status of the HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication.
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication
Port Number
Displays HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port Number.
LDAP-SSL/TLS
Displays the status of the LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication.
Communication* 8
Verify Remote
Server
Certificate* 8
Displays the status of the Verify Remote Server Certificate.
Protocol
Displays the protocol status.
IKE
Displays IKE authentication.
Enable IEEE
802.1x
Displays the status of IEEE 802.1x.
Authentication
Method
Displays the setting of authentication method for IEEE 802.1x.
Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the
Address
IP Filter
(IPv4)* 9
printer.
Address Mask
Displays the list of subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the
printer.
Active Mode
Displays whether to be permitted or denied access to the printer.
* 1 This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wired network.
* 2 This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wireless network.
* 3 This item is displayed when IPv4 Mode is selected.
* 4 This item is displayed when IPv6 Mode is selected.
* 5 This item is displayed only when Use Manual Address is Enable.
* 6 This item is displayed only when an IP address has been assigned.
* 7 This item is available only when using IPv6 dual mode.
* 8 This item is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
* 9 This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
NetWare Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of NetWare. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change
the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
NetWare
SLP
Port Status
Displays the port status. When NetWare is implemented, the status of TCP/IP is also
displayed.
Device Name
Displays the printer name.
Active Mode
Displays the current mode for Active Mode.
Tree Name
Displays the tree name.
Context Name
Displays the context name of the Print Server Object.
Polling Interval
Displays the time interval from when print data enters the print queue until printing
starts.
Status
Information
Displays messages according to the conditions of the printer.
Active Discovery
Displays whether active discovery is enabled.
E-Mail Alert Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the e-mail feature
and E-Mail Alerts feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to
the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Primary SMTP
Gateway
Displays the primary SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) gateway.
SMTP Port Number
Displays the SMTP port number.
E-Mail Send
E-Mail Server
Settings
Authentication
POP3 Server
Address
Displays the POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) server address.
POP3 Port Number
Displays the POP3 port number.
Reply Address
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server
Connection
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail List 1
Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature
specified in E-mail List 1.
Select Alerts for
List 1
E-Mail Alert
Settings
Displays the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
E-Mail List 2
Select Alerts for
List 2
Supplies Alerts
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert, for consumables.
Paper Handling
Alerts
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert, for paper handling.
Service Call
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert, for Service Calls.
Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature
specified in E-mail List 2.
Supplies Alerts
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert, for consumables.
Paper Handling
Alerts
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert, for paper handling.
Service Call
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert, for Service Calls.
Print Server Settings
The Print Server Settings tab includes Basic Information, Port Settings, TCP/IP, NetWare, E-Mail Alert,
Bonjour(mDNS), SNMP, Wireless LAN, and Reset Print Server pages.
Basic Information
Purpose:
To configure the printer's basic information.
Values:
System
Settings
EWS
Settings
Printer Name
Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Location
Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Contact Person
Specifies the contact name, number, and other information of the printer's administrator
and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Administrator EMail Address
Specifies the contact address of the printer's administrator and service center using up
to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Asset Tag
Number
Enter the asset tag number for the printer.
Auto Refresh
Sets whether or not to automatically refresh the contents of the status display pages.
Auto Refresh
Interval
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display pages
automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.
NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the Top Frame, Printer Status page, Job List
page, and Completed Jobs page.
Port Settings
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features.
Values:
Ethernet
Settings
Ethernet*
1
Auto
Detects Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings
automatically.
10Base-T
Half-Duplex
Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as the default value.
10Base-T
Full-Duplex
Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
100Base-TX HalfDuplex
Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex as the default value.
100Base-TX FullDuplex
Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex as the default value.
1000Base-T FullDuplex
Selects 1000Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
Current Ethernet Settings
Displays the current settings of Ethernet.
MAC
Address
Displays the printer's MAC address.
LPD
Select the check box to enable LPD.
Port9100 Select the check box to enable Port9100.
Port
Status
IPP
Select the check box to enable the IPP port.
WSD
Select the check box to enable the WSD port.
FTP
Select the check box to enable FTP.
NetWare
Select the check box to enable the NetWare port. You can also configure the transport protocol
to be used. TCP/IP can be selected simultaneously as the transport protocol.
Bonjour
(mDNS)
Select the check box to enable the Bonjour(mDNS) feature.
E-Mail
Alert
Select the check box to enable the E-Mail Alert feature.
Telnet
Select the check box to enable Telnet.
SNMP
Select the check box to enable the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol).
You can also configure the transport protocol to be used. UDP and IPX can be selected
simultaneously as the transport protocol.
* 1 This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wired network.
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or
configure the settings, click the Apply New settings button to apply new settings.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Values:
IP Mode
Specifies the IP mode.
Host Name
Specifies the host name.
IPv4
IP Address Mode
Selects the IP address mode.
Manual IP
Address
Sets the IP address.
Manual Subnet
Sets the subnet mask.
Mask
TCP/IP
Settings
Manual Gateway
Address
Sets the gateway address.
Enable Stateless
Address
Select the check box to enable the slateless address.
Use Manual
Address
Select the check box to set the IP address manually.
Manual Address
Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter the address
followed by a slash (/) and then "64". For details, consult your
system administrator.
Manual Gateway
Address
Sets the gateway address.
IPv6
DNS Domain
Name
IPv4
IPv6
DNS
Specifies the domain name of the domain name server. Up to 255 alphanumeric
characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to specify more than one
domain name, separate them using a comma or semicolon.
Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCP
Select the check box to get the DNS server address automatically
from the DHCP server.
Manual DNS
Server Address
Sets the DNS server address.
Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCPv6-lite
Select the check box to get the DNS server address automatically
from the DHCPv6-lite server.
Manual DNS
Server Address
Sets the DNS server address.
DNS Dynamic
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
Update (IPv4)
DNS Dynamic
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
Update (IPv6)
Auto Generate
Select the check box to automatically generate the search list.
Search List
LPD
Search
Domain Name
Specifies the search domain name. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and
hyphens can be used. If you need to specify more than one domain name, separate them
using a comma or semicolon.
Time-out
Specifies the time-out period between 1 and 60 seconds.
Priority to
IPv6 DNS
Name
Resolution
Select the check box to enable the DNS Name Resolution feature.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
IP Filter
(IPv4)
To set the IP Filter settings, click IP Filter (IPv4). The IP Filter (IPv4) page is displayed.
Port Number
Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.
Connection
Port9100 Time-Out
IPP
Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 1000 seconds.
IP Filter
(IPv4)
To set the IP Filter settings, click IP Filter (IPv4). The IP Filter (IPv4) page is displayed.
Printer URI
Displays the printer URI.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
Port Number
Displays the port number for receiving requests from the client.
Maximum
Sessions
Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.
Port Number
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
WSD
FTP
HTTP
Telnet
Receive
Time-Out
Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.
Notification
Time-Out
Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
Maximum
Number of
TTL
Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Maximum
Number of
Notification
Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.
Password
Sets the password for FTP.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
Port Number
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Simultaneous
Connections
Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.
Password
Sets the password for Telnet.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
NetWare
Purpose:
To configure detailed settings for NetWare.
Values:
Device
Name
Active Mode
NetWare
Specifies the printer name up to 47 alphanumeric characters.
For PServer Mode, set the Print Server Name (Print Server Object Name). The original setting
remains valid if no input is made.
Directory: PServer Mode
Selects this option when using in Directory: PServer Mode.
Bindery: PServer Mode
Selects this option when using in Bindery: PServer Mode.
Tree Name
Specifies the tree name up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Configure this item only when
Directory: PServer Mode is selected.
Context
Name
Specifies the context name of the Print Server Object up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Configure this item only when Directory: PServer Mode is selected.
Polling
Interval
Sets the time interval from when print data enters the print queue until printing starts. The
setting range is from 1 to 1000 seconds. The original setting remains valid if no input is
made. Configure this item only when Bindery: PServer Mode or Directory: PServer Mode
is selected.
Password
Sets the print server password up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Configure this item only
when Bindery: PServer Mode or Directory: PServer Mode is selected.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again.
Status
Displays the status of NetWare.
Information
SLP
Active
Discovery
Select the check box to enable Active Discovery.
NOTE: The settings in the NetWare page will be valid only when NetWare or the printer is rebooted. Click the
Apply New settings button to apply new settings.
E-Mail Alert
Purpose:
To configure detailed settings for E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by clicking E-Mail Alert in the Left Frame.
Values:
Primary SMTP
Gateway
Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port
Number
Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be 25, 587 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
E-Mail Send
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
Authentication
E-Mail
Server
Settings
SMTP Login
User
Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, under
bars, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
SMTP Login
Password
Specifies the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
SMTP Login
Password
Enter the SMTP account password again to confirm it.
POP3 Server
Address* 1
Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS
host name using up to 63 characters.
POP3 Port
Number* 1
Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
POP User
Name* 1
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@) can
be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.
POP User
Password* 1
Specifies the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter POP
User
Password* 1
Enter the POP3 account password again to confirm it.
Reply Address
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server
Connection
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail List 1
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature using up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Select Alerts
for List 1
E-Mail
Alert
Settings
Specifies the POP3 account user name.
E-Mail List 2
Select Alerts
for List 2
Supplies Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.
Paper Handling
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper
handling.
Service Call
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature using up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Supplies Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.
Paper Handling
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper
handling.
Service Call
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.
* 1 This item is available only when POP before SMTP for E-Mail Send Authentication is selected.
Bonjour (mDNS)
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings for Bonjour.
Values:
Host
Name
Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash). The original setting will remain
valid if no input is made.
Printer
Name
Specifies the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets. The original setting will
remain valid if no input is made.
SNMP
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Values:
Enable SNMP v1/v2c
Protocol
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
Edit SNMP v1/v2c
Properties
Click to display SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of SNMP v1/v2c protocol
from the page.
Enable SNMP v3 Protocol
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.
Edit SNMP v3 Properties
Click to display SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3 protocol from the
page.
Without SSL communication is enabled, you cannot click this item.
SNMP v1/v2c
Purpose:
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v1/v2c Properties in the SNMP page.
Values:
Community
Name (Read
only)* 1
Specifies the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for community name in
the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read Community is public.
Re-enter
Community
Name (Read
only)* 1
Enter the community name to access (read only) data again to confirm it.
Specifies the community name to access (read and write) data using up to 31 alphanumeric
Community
characters.
Name
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for community name in
(Read/Write)* 1 the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write Community is
private.
Re-enter
Community
Enter the community name to access (read and write) data again to confirm it.
Name
1
(Read/Write)*
Community
Name (Trap)* 1
Specifies the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original settings will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for Community Name
(Trap) in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community is " "
(NULL).
Re-enter
Community
Name (Trap)* 1
Enter the community name used for trap again to confirm it.
Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify the IP address and IP socket in
the following format:
IPv4
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of "nnn"
Trap
is a variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for the first
Notification 1-4 three-digits only. IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.
IPv6
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm
format. Each section of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP socket
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.
Authenticate
Error Trap
Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.
*1 The default value of each items can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
SNMP v3
Purpose:
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.
To enter this page, click Enable SNMP v3 Protocol in the SNMP page.
Values:
Administrator Account
Print Drivers / Remote
Client Account
Account Enabled
Select the check box to enable the administrator account.
User Name
Enter the user name of the administrator account.
Authentication
Password
Specifies the authentication password of the administrator account
using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
Enter the authentication password of the administrator account
again to confirm it.
Privacy Password
Specifies the privacy password of the administrator account using 8
to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter Privacy
Password
Enter the privacy password of the administrator account again to
confirm it.
Account Enabled
Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client
account.
Reset to default
Password
Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client
account to default.
Wireless LAN
Purpose:
To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network.
To use the wireless adapter, be sure to disconnect the network cable.
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.
Values:
SSID
Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Wireless
Settings
Network
Type
Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.
MAC
Address
Displays the MAC address of the printer's wireless network adapter.
Link
Channel
Displays the channel number of the printer's wireless connection.
Link
Quality
Displays the quality of the printer's wireless network connection.
Select the security method from the list.
Security
Settings
Encryption
No Security
Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting without
specifying a security method from WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPAEnterprise.
WEP
Specifies the WEP to use through the wireless network.
WPA-PSK(WPA2PSK)*1, 2
Specifies the WPA-PSK to use through the wireless network.
WPAEnterprise(WPA2Enterprise)* 2, 3, 4
Specifies the WPA-Enterprise to use through the wireless network.
Encryption Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii.
WEP
WPA-PSK
WEP Key
1
Specifies the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or
WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
Re-enter
WEP Key
1
Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm it.
WEP Key
2
Specifies the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or
WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
Re-enter
WEP Key
2
Enter the WEP key 2 again to confirm it.
WEP Key
3
Specifies the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or
WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
Re-enter
WEP Key
3
Enter the WEP key 3 again to confirm it.
WEP Key
4
Specifies the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or
WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
Re-enter
WEP Key
4
Enter the WEP key 4 again to confirm it.
Transmit
Key
Specifies the transmit key type from the list.
Pass
Phrase
Specifies the pass phrase.
Re-enter
Pass
Phrase
Enter the pass phrase again to confirm it.
Encryption
Shows the encryption method.
Method
Login
Name
WPAEnterprise*4, EAP5
Identity
Specifies the login name for the authentication.
Specifies the EAP-Identity for the authentication.
Password
Specifies the password.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again to confirm it.
* 1 For encryption, AES or TKIP method is used.
* 2 This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network Type.
* 3 For authentication and encryption by digital certificate, AES or TKIP method is used.
* 4 This item is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
* 5 To activate the setting, import a certificate which supports wireless LAN (server) on the SSL/TLS pages, and enable
the relevant certificate in advance.
NOTE: This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wireless network.
NOTE: The optional wireless adapter supports WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, and WPA-PSK-AES.
Reset Print Server
Purpose:
To initialize non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize the printer's
NVRAM from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Values:
Initialize NIC NVRAM Memory
and restart printer
Click the Start button to initialize NVRAM. Network settings will revert to the factory
default settings and reboot the network capability.
Restart Printer
Click the Start button to reboot the printer.
Security
The Security tab includes Set Password, Authentication System, Kerberos Server, LDAP Server, LDAP
Authentication, SSL/TLS, IPsec, 802.1x and IP Filter(IPv4).
Set Password
Purpose:
To set or change the password that is required to access the printer's setup parameters from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Set the password of the operator panel from Panel Lock in the Printer Settings. This page can also be displayed by
clicking Set Password in the Left Frame.
NOTE: To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).
Values:
Administrator
Password
Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The password will appear as
asterisks (*) in the field when it is entered.
Re-enter
Administrator
Password
Enter the password again to confirm.
Access denial by the
authentication
failure of the
Administrator
Specifies the amount of time the administrator should wait for the access to the printer's setup
from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Sets the time period from 5 up to 255 seconds. The
access is denied if the time-out time is exceeded. If you set 0, this mode is disabled.
Authentication System
Purpose:
To specify the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search time-out.
Values:
Authentication
System Settings
Select the authentication system from the list.
Server Response
Time-Out
Specifies the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the server. Sets the
time period from 1 up to 75 seconds.
Search Time-Out
Specifies the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the server. Sets the
time period from 5 up to 120 seconds.
Kerberos Server
Purpose:
To specify the settings for the Kerberos Server.
Values:
Primary Server Name / IP
Address & Port
Sets the primary server name or IP address, and the port address. The port
address must be 88 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
Secondary Server Name /
IP Address & Port
Sets the secondary server name or IP address, and the port address. The port
address must be 88 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name.
LDAP Server
Purpose:
To specify the settings of the LDAP server.
Values:
IP Address / Host
Name & Port
Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port address must
be 389, 636 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
Server
Backup IP Address /
Information
Host Name & Port
Sets backup IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 389, 636 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
LDAP Server
Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.
Search Directory
Root
Enter the search directory root.
Login Name
Enter the login name of the administrator.
Operation
Password
Information
Enter the administrator password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If
the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
Re-enter-Password
Enter the administrator password again to confirm it.
Search
Time-Out
Select Wait LDAP Server Limit and the specified wait time. The specified wait
time must be between 5 and 120 seconds.
LDAP Authentication
Purpose:
To specify the LDAP server authentication method.
Values:
Authentication Method
Shows the authentication method.
Use Added Text String
Select whether to use the added text string from the list.
Text String Added to User Name Enter the added text string.
SSL/TLS
Purpose:
To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer, and set/delete the certificate used for IPsec,
LDAPS, or Wireless LAN.
Values:
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication* 1
Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication
Port Number
Specifies the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP for SSL/TLS. This must be
443 or between 8000 and 9999.
LDAP-SSL/TLS
Communication* 1,
2
Verify Remote
Server
Certificate* 2
Select the check box to enable the LDAP, and access is established using SSL/TLS
communication.
Select the check box to enable the Verify Remote Server Certificate function.
Click to display Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to create a security certification
from the page. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate button is available only when the self-signed
certificate is not generated.
Generate SelfSigned
Certificate* 3
Size of Public
Key
Select the size of public key.
Issuer
Specifies the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
Generate
Signed
Certificate
Click to generate the SSL self-signed certificate.
Click to display Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the certificate file to the device
from the page.
Upload Signed
Certificate* 3, 4
Password
Enter the password to upload the certificate file.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again for confirmation.
Search
Directory Root
Click the Browse button, browse the file name to upload to the device.
Import
Click the Import button to upload the certificate file to the device.
Click to display Certificate Management page and to manage a security certification from the
page.
Certificate
Management
* 3, 4
Certificate List* 3
Category
Select the device to certificate.
Certificate
Purpose
Select the connection to certificate.
Certificate
Order
Select the order to certificate.
Display the
List
Click to display the Certificate List page.
Category
Displays the device to certificate selected at Certificate Management page.
Certificate
Purpose
Select the connection to certificate selected at Certificate Management
page.
Issued To
Displays the list of certificate order.
Validity
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Certificate
Details
Display the Certificate Details page. The Certificate Management page is
displayed when no item in the Issued to column is selected.
Certificate
Details* 3
Category
Displays the device to certificate selected at Certificate Management page
or SSL/TLS page.
Issued To
Displays the device to certificate.
Issuer
Displays the issuer to certificate.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the device.
Size of Public
Key
Display Size of Public Key.
Valid From
Displays the time the certificate is valid.
Valid Until
Displays the time the certificate is invalid.
Status
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Certificate
Purpose
Displays the purpose of certificate.
Certificate
Selection
Status
Displays the type of device certificate you selected.
E-mail Address Displayed only when an e-mail address is specified in the certificate.
Use This
Certificate* 2
Click to apply this certificate to the device.
Delete
Click to delete this certificate.
Export This
Certificate* 2
Click to export the certificate to the other device.
* 1 This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.
* 2 This item is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
* 3 This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the
pages.
* 4 This item is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption. If not, "Certificate
Details" is displayed.
IPsec
Purpose:
To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the printer.
Values:
Protocol
Select the check box to enable the protocol.
IKE
Select IKE authentication. Digital Signature is displayed on the list only when an effective digital
signature is set up.
Pre-Shared Key* 1
Specifies a shared key when Pre-Shared Key is selected for the IKE setting. Up to 255
alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used.
Re-enter Pre-Shared
Enter the shared key again to confirm it.
Key
Device Certificate*1
Displays the device certificate.
IKE SA Lifetime
Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.
IPsec SA Lifetime
Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.
DH Group
Selects the DH group.
PFS
Selects the check box to enable the PFS setting.
Remote peers IPv4
address
Specifies the IP address to connect to.
Remote peers IPv6
address
Specifies the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec
communication
policy
Selects whether or not to communicate with a device which does not support IPsec.
* 1 This item is effective only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
NOTE: If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the Reset IPsec menu on the operator
panel.
802.1x
Purpose:
To specify the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the printer.
Values:
Enable IEEE 802.1x
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x authentication.
EAP-MD5
Authentication Method
EAP-MS-CHAPv2
Select the authentication method to use for IEEE 802.1x authentication.
PEAP/MSCHAPv2
Login Name: (Device
Name)
Specifies the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128
alphanumeric characters.
Password
Specifies the login password for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter Password
Enter the login password again to confirm it.
IP Filter
Purpose:
To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.
Values:
Address
Specifies the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value
between 0 and 255 in each field.
Address
Mask
Specifies the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value
between 0 and 255 in each field.
Active
Mode
Reject
Rejects printing from specified network address.
Permit
Permits printing from specified network address.
Disabled
Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.
Copy Printer Settings
The Copy Printer Settings menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report pages.
Copy Printer Settings
Purpose:
To copy the printer settings and ColorTrack (Internal Setting) to one or more of the same model of the printer.
To copy the settings to another printer, specify the IP address and password of the printer to which the settings are
copied in the IP Address text box and Password text box. Then, click the Copy the settings to the Host in the
above list button. Copying the settings is complete. The connection time-out period is 60 seconds. After that, you can
check whether the settings were copied to this page. And you need to click the Copy the settings to the Host in the
above list and reboot the machine button of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to
verify if the settings were actually copied or not.
If the settings can be copied but printer configuration is different, the settings of only the same items are copied. Printer
settings are simultaneously copied to printer of up to 10 IP addresses.
Copy Printer Settings Report
Purpose:
To verify the histories of copying.
NOTE: The print history is cleared when you turn off the printer.
Print Volume
The Print Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages.
Print Volume
Purpose:
To verify the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the Left Frame.
Values:
Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.
Paper Used
Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.
Dell ColorTrack
Purpose:
To specify which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.
Values:
ColorTrack Mode
Off
Enables to print the data with no authentication information.
Internal Mode
Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in
the internal server.
External Mode
Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in
the external server.
No Account User
Print
Specifies whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information. To permit
the printing for non-account user, set to On.
ColorTrack Error
Report
Specifies whether to automatically print error-related information if printing using ColorTrack
results in an error.
No-account User
Password* 1
Specifies the password to be used for non-account user using 1 to 127 alphanumeric
characters. If the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
Re-enter No-account
User Password* 1
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Click Edit User Registration to display the Edit Print User Registration page.
To register a user, click Create to open the Print User Settings page.
To delete a user, click Delete to open the Delete User page. Clicking the Back button
returns the screen to the status prior to deleting the user.
To confirm or change the registered user, click Confirm/Change to open the Print
User Settings page.
User
Registration* 2
User Registration No.
Displays the user registration number. The Delete User button is
displayed when the user is already registered.
User Name
Specifies the user name.
Password
Specifies the user password using 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter password
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Color Mode Limitation Specifies whether to limit color printing.
Setup Remote
Authentication* 3
Upper Limit for Color
Print
Specifies the maximum number of pages allowed for color printing.
Cumulative Color
Page Count
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for color printing.
Upper Limit for
Monochrome Print
Specifies the maximum number of pages allowed for monochrome
printing.
Cumulative
Monochrome Page
Count
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for monochrome
printing.
Click to display Authentication System page.
* 1 The password must be set when External Mode is selected for ColorTrack Mode and No Account User Print is set to
on.
* 2 This item is displayed only when ColorTrack Mode is Internal Mode.
* 3 This item is displayed only when ColorTrack Mode is External Mode.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the trays.
Values:
Tray 1 Paper Type
Sets the type of paper loaded in the first tray from the top.
Tray 1 Paper Size
Sets the size of paper loaded in the first tray from the top.
Tray 1 Custom Size
-Y
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the first tray from the top.
Tray 1 Custom Size
-X
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the first tray from the top.
Tray 2 Paper
Type* 1
Sets the type of paper loaded in the second tray from the top.
Tray 2 Paper
Size* 1
Sets the size of paper loaded in the second tray from the top.
Tray 2 Custom Size
- Y* 1
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the second tray from the top.
Tray 2 Custom Size
- X* 1
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the second tray from the top.
Tray 3 Paper
Type* 1
Sets the type of paper loaded in the third tray from the top.
Tray 3 Paper
1
Sets the size of paper loaded in the third tray from the top.
Size*
Tray 3 Custom Size
- Y* 1
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the third tray from the top.
Tray 3 Custom Size
- X* 1
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in third tray from the top.
Tray 4 Paper
Type* 2
Sets the type of paper loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 4 Paper
Size* 2
Sets the size of paper loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 4 Custom Size
- Y* 2
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 4 Custom Size
- X* 2
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 5 Paper
Type* 2
Sets the type of paper loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
Tray 5 Paper
Size* 2
Sets the size of paper loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
Tray 5 Custom Size
- Y* 2
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
Tray 5 Custom Size
- X* 2
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
MPF Mode
Sets the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the MPF.
Display Popup* 3
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts to set the paper size and type when
paper is loaded in the tray 1.
MPF Paper Type* 3
Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Paper Size* 3
Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom Size Y* 3
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom Size X* 3
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
* 1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder or 1100-sheet feeder is installed.
* 2 This item is available only when the optional 1100-sheet feeder is installed.
* 3 This item is displayed only when Panel Specified is selected for MPF Mode.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Print Media Guidelines
Paper
Transparencies
Envelopes
Labels
Storing Print Media
Identifying Print Media and Specifications
Print media is paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality printing on a
variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section
describes selecting print media, caring for print media, and loading the print media in the tray 1 or optional 550-sheet
feeder.
Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in black
and white, use 90 g/m 2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying
large quantities of any print media.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See
"Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" for detailed loading
instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is recommended that you follow these guidelines
when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m 2 (16 to 80 lb bond) grain long. The multipurpose feeder
(MPF) automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m 2 (16 to 80 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m 2
(16 lb) may not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond) grain long
paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually
occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped,
even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems regardless of
humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF.
Smoothness
The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse to the
paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.
Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper properly.
Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture
changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the
paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m 2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are
recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m 2 (36 lb bond), grain short is preferred.
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton
possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper designed for
general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high temperatures without
discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures.
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any print media,
you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fuser
Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such
as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.
Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper
Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309
Multiple-part forms or documents
Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.
Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
Always use new, undamaged paper.
Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.
Do not remove the tray while a job is printing.
Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead
When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer:
Use grain long paper for best results.
Use only media and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must withstand
temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oilbased should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Printing on Letterhead
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed letterhead you have selected is acceptable
for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following table for help when loading letterhead in the
print media sources.
Print media source
Print side
Page orientation
Face up
Tray 1
Letterhead enters the printer first
550-sheet feeder
1100-sheet feeder
Face down
MPF
Letterhead enters the printer first
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in manufacturing techniques. However, it
may not be possible to print on the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.
To select and use pre-punched paper:
Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.
Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled
paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.
Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent
cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.
Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.
Transparencies
You can load up to 75 sheets of transparencies in the MPF or tray 1 for a single print job. It is recommended that you try
a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
When printing on transparencies:
Set the paper type to Transparency from the printer driver to avoid damaging your printer.
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Do not use regular transparencies. Transparencies must
be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting or releasing hazardous
emissions.
Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies. This may result in poor print quality.
Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Non-white transparencies are not supported with the printer.
Selecting Transparencies
The printer can print directly on transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Print quality and durability depend on
the transparency used. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
The paper type setting for the MPF should be set to Transparency to help prevent jams. (See "Tray Settings" for detailed
information about this setting.) Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether your transparencies are
compatible with laser printers that reach temperatures as high as 205°C (401°F). Only use transparencies that are able to
withstand these temperatures without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
NOTE: For the tray 1, setting paper size is not required. The tray 1 detects the paper size automatically. For more
information on supported paper size for the standard and optional trays, see "Supported Paper Sizes."
Envelopes
Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of light wrinkling. It is recommended that you
try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. See "Loading Print Media" for instructions on loading
an envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
Set the print media source to the MPF or tray 1. Set the paper type to Envelope, and select the correct size of
envelope from the printer driver.
For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m 2 (28 lb
bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with 100% cotton
content must not exceed 90 g/m 2 (24 lb bond) weight.
Use only freshly unpacked, undamaged envelopes.
Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the
envelope supplier.
Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
To load envelope in the MPF, insert the envelopes with the flaps closed and the short-edge of the envelopes facing
into the printer. The print side must be facing down.
See "Loading Print Media in the MPF" for instructions on loading an envelope.
Use one envelope size during a print job.
Ensure the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%) and the high printing temperatures may seal
the envelopes.
For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
Have excessive curl or twist
Are stuck together or damaged in any way
Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing
Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
Have an interlocking design
Have postage stamps attached
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
Have nicked edges or bent corners
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
NOTE: You can load envelopes also on the tray 1. For more information, see "Loading an Envelope in Standard
Trays."
Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed for use with laser printers. Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock),
and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).
It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
When printing on labels:
Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.
Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray. This may result in a jam.
Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die cut.
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate your printer and your cartridge with adhesive, and could void your printer and cartridge
warranties.
Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the
label.
Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the
adhesive is at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and could
void your warranty.
If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, a 3 mm (0.125 inches) strip should be removed on the leading and
driver edge, and a non-oozing adhesive should be used.
Remove a 3 mm (0.125 inches) strip from the leading edge to prevent labels from peeling inside the printer.
Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media feeding problems and uneven print quality.
For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the
relative humidity is 40%.
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
that the edges do not buckle or curl.
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Identifying Print Media and Specifications
The following tables provide information on standard and optional print media.
Supported Paper Sizes
Standard
Tray
Option
Tray
Output Expander
(Set* 2 )
Output Expander
(Sheet* 1 )
MPF
A4
(210 x 297 mm)
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
A5
(148 x 210 mm)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
B5
(182 x 257 mm)
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Letter
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Folio
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Legal
Duplexer
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5
in.)
Y
Y*3
N
N
Y
N
Monarch
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
Y
Y*3
N
N
Y
N
DL
(4.25 x 8.75 in.)
Y
Y*3
N
N
Y
N
C5
(9 x 6.5 in.)
Y
Y*3
N
N
Y
N
Custom
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
*1:
In this mode, each page is output separately to the stacker tray.
*2:
In this mode, the document is sorted into sets or jobs and output to the stacker tray.
*3:
To print envelopes using the standard tray, you must select the kind of the
envelope in the Tray1 Settings. For details, see "Understanding the Printer Menus."
Supported Paper Types
Plain
MPF
Onesided
Twosided
Standard Tray
Onesided
Twosided
Option Tray
Onesided
Twosided
Duplexer
Onesided
Output Expander
(Sheet*1 )
Twosided
Onesided
Twosided
Output Expander
(Set* 2 )
Onesided
Twosided
Normal Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Thick
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Normal Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Thick
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Normal Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
Thick
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Normal Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Covers
Coated
Label
Envelope
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Recycled
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Transparency
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
*1:
In this mode, each page is output separately to the stacker tray.
*2:
In this mode, the document is sorted into sets or jobs and output to the stacker tray.
Paper Type Specifications
Paper type
Plain Paper
Weight (gsm)
60-80
Remarks
-
Plain Thick Paper 81-105
-
Covers
106-162
-
Covers Thick
163-216
-
Coated Normal
106-162
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Coated Thick
163-216
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Transparency
-
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Label Normal
-
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Label Thick
-
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Envelopes
-
-
Recycled
-
-
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Loading Print Media
Capacity
Print Media Dimensions
Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays
Loading Print Media in the MPF
Linking Trays
Using the Duplex Function
Using the Center Output Tray
Using the Stacker Tray
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually on the
print media package.
NOTE: After loading paper in the tray, specify the same paper type on the operator panel.
Capacity
The tray 1 can hold:
550 sheets of standard paper.
The optional 550-sheet feeder can hold:
550 sheets of standard paper.
The optional 1100-sheet feeder can hold:
1100 sheets of standard paper.
The MPF can hold:
150 sheet of the standard paper.
Print Media Dimensions
The standard and optional trays accept print media within the following dimensions:
Width - 98.4 mm (Monarch) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Length - 190.5 mm (Monarch) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
The MPF accepts print media within the following dimensions:
Width - 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Length - 127 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while a printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
All trays are loaded the same way:
1. Remove the paper tray from the printer.
2. Adjust the width guides to the size of paper to be loaded.
3. Adjust the length guide to the size of paper to be loaded.
4. Before loading the paper, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them.
Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
5. Load paper into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
6. After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted, replace the paper tray into the printer.
7. Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than plain print media is loaded. If a userspecified print media is loaded in the standard 550-sheet tray, you must specify the paper size setting by using the
operator panel.
NOTE: For standard-size papers, adjust the guides first and then set papers.
Loading an Envelope in Standard Trays
1. Raise the latch on the handle of the right hand cover to open the cover.
2. Press down the lever to set the envelope mode.
NOTE: If you insert media other than envelopes, lift up the lever.
NOTE: If you use the optional output expander, raise the lever as shown in the illustration.
NOTE: To print plain paper using the optional output expander, check if the lever is pulled down as shown in the
illustration.
3. Load the envelope into the tray.
When Loading Envelope#10, Monarch, or DL
When Loading C5
NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and
can cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap completely closed.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may
bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below when loading them in the MPF.
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the lead edge of the envelopes as shown in the
following illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5mm or less.
Loading Letterhead
The letterhead must be toward the top edge of the standard tray or the optional feeder with the print side facing up.
However, the letterhead must be inserted top edge first with the print side facing down when loading paper into the
multipurpose feeder (MPF).
Print media source
Print side
Page orientation
Face up
Tray 1
Letterhead enters the printer first
550-sheet feeder
1100-sheet feeder
Face down
MPF
Letterhead enters the printer first
Loading Print Media in the MPF
1. Gently pull open the MPF cover.
2. Extend the extension tray.
3. Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.
4. Insert all media facing down and top edge first into the MPF.
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.
5. Slide both width guides until they rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.
6. Ensure the type setting for the MPF is set to the correct value for the print media you have loaded.
7. Select print media source, size, and type in your software program and select the print media size and type on the
printer operator panel.
Loading an Envelope in the MPF
1. Open the right hand cover.
2. Press down the lever to set the envelope mode.
NOTE: If you insert plain paper in the other tray, lift up the lever.
3. Insert the envelopes with the flaps closed and the short-edge of the envelopes facing into the printer.
Orient the print side facing down and slide the envelope into the entry slot.
You can load envelopes up to the maximum fill line in the tray at one time.
When Loading Envelope#10, Monarch, or DL
When Loading C5
NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and
can cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap completely closed.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may
bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below when loading them in the MPF.
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the lead edge of the envelopes as shown in the
following illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5mm or less.
Using the MPF
Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.
To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality print media that is designed for use in laser
printers. For more guidelines on print media, see "Print Media Guidelines."
Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the MPF or when the printer is printing from the
MPF. This may result in a paper jam.
Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side down and the top of the print media going into the
MPF first.
Do not place objects on the MPF. Also, avoid pressing down or applying excessive force on it.
The icons on the MPF identify how to load the MPF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for printing.
Linking Trays
The printer automatically links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them. The first tray will
be utilized until the media runs out after which the next tray will be used.
NOTE: The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.
The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) cannot be linked to any of the tray sources.
After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the Paper Type setting in the Tray
Settings component for each source (tray).
To disable tray linking change the Paper type in one of the sources (trays) to a unique value.
NOTE: If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in each tray, the printer will automatically link
them if the paper type is not specified in the printer driver properties/preferences.
Using the Duplex Function
Duplex printing (or two-sided printing) allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For sizes that are acceptable
for duplex printing, see "Supported Paper Sizes."
Using Booklet Print
To use booklet print, you must select either Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu in the
printer properties dialog box and then select Booklet Creation in the Booklet/Poster/Mixed Document dialog box
displayed by clicking the Booklet/Poster/Mixed Document button. From the Duplex menu, you can define the way 2sided print pages are bound, and how the printing on the back of the sheet (even-numbered pages) is oriented in relation
to the printing on the front (odd-numbered pages).
NOTE: When XPS driver is used, booklet print is not available.
Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for
landscape orientation). The following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and landscape pages:
Flip on
Long
Edge
Flip on
Short
Edge
Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for
landscape orientation). The following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait and landscape pages:
Using the Center Output Tray
The center output tray holds up to:
500 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m 2 )) of plain paper
Using the Stacker Tray
The stacker tray holds up to:
Discharging Not
Stapled Paper size
mode
stapled
In bulk
1,000sheet
50-set (SFP)
or 750A4: P: 64gsm
sheet
A4: C2: 70gsm
Letter: Business 4200: 20 lb
Letter: Color Xpressions+: 24 lb
(MPF)
A4: Premier: 80gsm
A4: Premier: 4-hole punched: 80gsm
A4: Business: 80gsm
A4: Colotech+: 90gsm
Letter: Business 4200: 75gsm
Letter: Digital Color Xpressions+: 90gsm/24 lb
750sheet
50-set Legal: Business 4200: 20 lb
or 500Legal: Color Xpressions+: 24 lb
sheet
Legal: Digital Color Xpressions+: 24 lb
On a oneby-one
basis
300sheet
-
B5, A6, B6, A5, Post card (US, 5 x 7, 3 x 5, 3.5 x 5, 3.5 x 5.5, 6
x 9), Statement, Coated (106 to 163gsm), Coated thick (164 to
216gsm), Label, Index paper* 1 , Transparency, Post card (134
to 190gsm)
NOTE: The number of sheets shown left may not be achieved
depending on the type or size of paper.
100sheet
-
Legal
NOTE: The number of sheets shown left may not be achieved
depending on the type or size of paper.
50sheet
-
Envelope (Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5)
NOTE: The number of sheets shown left may not be achieved
depending on the type or size of paper.
* 1 : Only those whose index tab is attached to its shorter side are available.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Operator Panel
Using the Operator Panel Buttons
Printing a Panel Settings Page
Using the Operator Panel Buttons
The operator panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), eight buttons, and an indicator that blinks when the printer is ready
to print, and when an error occurs.
1. Ready/Error indicator
Lights up green when the printer is ready or sleeping and blinks when data is being received.
Lights up yellow when an error occurs and blinks when an unrecoverable print error occurs.
2.
buttons
In the Menu mode, selects submenus or setting values.
3.
buttons
In the Menu mode, scrolls through menus or items. To enter numbers or passwords for secure print jobs,
press these buttons.
4. Cancel button
Cancels the current print job.
In the top menu of the Menu mode, switches to the Print mode.
In the submenu of the Menu mode, switches to the upper hierarchy of the menu.
5. Menu button
In the Print mode, switches to the Menu mode.
In the Menu mode, switches to the Print mode.
6.
(Set) button
In the Menu mode, displays the selected menu or item and determines the selected value.
7. Information button
When the information mark is displayed on the screen, press this button to view information, such as
resolving an error.
8. LCD panel
Printing a Panel Settings Page
The panel settings page shows current settings for the operator panel menus.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
(Set) button.
button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
The panel settings page is printed.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
4. Select Reports.
5. Click the Start button in the Panel Settings.
The panel settings report is printed.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Printing
Tips for Successful Printing
Sending a Job to Print
Canceling a Print Job
Printing a Report Page
Using the Stapling Function
Using the Offset Function
Using the Stored Print Function
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information from your printer, and how to cancel a job.
Tips for Successful Printing
Tips on Storing Print Media
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."
Avoiding Paper Jams
NOTE: It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are considering using with the
printer before purchasing large quantities.
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions on
loading print media:
"Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" (which includes the tray 1, the optional 550-sheet feeder,
and the optional 1100-sheet feeder)
"Loading Print Media in the MPF"
"Avoiding Jams"
If you experience a jam, see "Clearing Jams" for instructions.
Sending a Job to Print
To support all of the printer features, use the printer driver. When you choose Print from a software program, a window
representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are sending to print. Print
settings selected from the driver override the default menu settings selected from the operator panel.
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all of the available system settings you can change.
If you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.
To print a job from a typical Windows ® application:
1. Open the file you want to print.
2. From the File menu, select Print.
3. Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the printer settings as appropriate (such as the
pages you want to print or the number of copies).
4. Click Preferences to adjust system settings not available from the first screen, and then click OK.
5. Click OK or Print to send the job to the selected printer.
Canceling a Print Job
There are several methods for canceling a print job.
Canceling From the Operator Panel
To cancel a job after it has started printing:
Press Cancel.
Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1. Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2. Select the job you want to cancel.
3. Press Delete on the keyboard.
Canceling a Job From the Desktop
1. Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.
Click start® Printers and Faxes.
Click Start® Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2).
Click start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers (for Windows Vista®).
Click start® Control Panel® Printers (for Windows Server 2008).
Click start® Settings® Printers (for Windows 2000).
A list of available printers appears.
2. Double-click the printer you selected when you sent the job.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
3. Select the job you want to cancel.
4. Press Delete on the keyboard.
Printing a Report Page
By using the Report menu, you can print a variety of settings for your printer including printer settings, panel setting,
and font list. The following describes two examples of printing from the Report menu.
Printing a Printer Settings Page
To verify detailed printer settings, print a printer settings page. A printed printer settings page also allows you to verify
whether or not options have been installed properly.
See "Understanding the Printer Menus" to identify the display and operator panel buttons if you need help.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Printer Settings is displayed, and then press
The printer settings page is printed.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
4. Select Reports.
5. Click the Start button in the Printer Settings.
The printer settings page is printed.
The message Printer Settings Printing appears while the page prints. The printer returns to the standby mode after
the printer settings page prints.
If any other message appears when you print this page, see the online Help for more information.
Printing a Font Sample List
To print samples of all the fonts currently available for your printer:
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
(Set) button.
button until either PCL Fonts List or PS Fonts List is highlighted.
Select PCL Fonts List to print a listing of the fonts available to the PCL.
Select PS Fonts List to print a listing of the fonts available to the PostScript ® 3™.
4. Press
(Set) button.
The message PCL Fonts List Printing or PS Fonts List Printing appears and remains on the operator panel until
the page prints. The printer returns to the Ready to Print state after the font sample list prints.
Using the Stapling Function
When you use the staple function, you can staple each copy. The staple position is located at the upper-left of the paper
corner.
B5, A4, Letter, Executive, Folio (8.5), Legal, Plain, Plain-thick, Covers, Covers Thick and Recycled paper can be used with
the Stapling function.
NOTE: This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
NOTE: This item is available only when using the PCL or PS driver.
Using the Offset Function
When you use the offset function, you can identify one paper set from another paper set. When you select "Offset per
Set", you can offset each copy before printing the next copy. When you select "Offset per Job", you can offset each copy
per paper job you specify. You can also specify whether to staple or insert a banner sheet after offsetting each copy.
B5, A4, Letter, Executive, Folio (8.5), Legal, Plain, Plain-thick, Covers, Covers Thick and Recycled paper can be used with
the Offset function.
NOTE: This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
NOTE: This item is available only when using the PCL or PS driver.
Examples of two jobs when printing two copies of a three page document:
Using the Stored Print Function
When you send a job to the printer, you can specify in the driver that you want the printer to store the job in memory.
When you are ready to print the job, go to the printer and use the operator panel menus to identify which job in the
memory or hard disk you want to print. You can use this function for Secure Print, Public MailBox Print, Private MailBox
Print, and Proof Print.
NOTE: The data in memory is cleared when the printer is turned off. The data on the optional hard disk is not
cleared even when the printer is turned off.
NOTE: Stored Print functions are available when:
Enabling the RAM disk in the operator panel menu and setting
"RAM Disk" to "Available" in the printer driver
or
Installing a hard disk in your printer and setting "Hard Disk"
to "Available" in the printer driver
The stored printing function includes the following job types.
Secure Print
You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory to output at a specified time at the printer. This feature can be
used to print confidential documents. A stored print job will be deleted after you print it, or after a designated period of
time has elapsed.
NOTE: This item is available when using the PCL or PS driver.
Private MailBox Print
You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory to output at a more convenient time at the printer. This feature
can be used to print confidential documents. The stored jobs remain in printer memory until you delete them on the
operator panel.
NOTE: This item is available when using the PCL or PS driver.
Public MailBox Print
You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory to output at a more convenient time at the printer. A print job is
stored until you delete it from printer memory on the printer operator panel. You cannot use the password function with
this feature. This function does not require a password to print a stored job.
NOTE: This item is available when using the PCL or PS driver.
Proof Print
When you specify multiple copies for a collated job, this feature allows you to print only the first set for checking, before
proceeding to print the remaining copies at the printer.
NOTE: Depending on the documents, its job may be too big for the available memory. In this case, an error occurs.
NOTE: If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver, the job's name will be identified
using the PC's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name.
NOTE: This item is available when using the PCL or PS driver.
Storing Print Jobs
When you select a job type other than "Normal Print" in the "Paper/Output" tab of the printer driver, the job will be stored
in temporary memory or stored on the hard disk until you request to print it from the operator panel.
NOTE: Secure Print and Private MailBox Print require specifying a password for confidentiality.
Printing the Stored Jobs
Once jobs are stored, you can use the operator panel to specify printing. Select the job type you are using from Secure
Print, Private MailBox Print, Public MailBox Print, and Proof Print. Then, you select your user name from a list. Secure Print
and Private MailBox Print require the password you specified in the driver when you sent the job.
To print the stored documents, use the procedure below.
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Print Menu is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
3. Press
button until your desirable job type is highlighted, and then press
The stored document will be printed.
(Set) button.
Specifying your password on the operator panel (Secure
Print/Private MailBox Print)
When you select Secure Print or Private MailBox Print from the Print Menu after selecting your user name, the
following prompt is displayed:
[************]
Use the buttons on the operator panel to enter the numeric password you specified in the printer driver. The password you
entered will be displayed to ensure confidentiality.
If you enter an invalid password, the message Wrong Password appears. Wait three seconds, or Press
button to return to the screen for user selection.
(Set) or Cancel
When you enter a valid password, you have access to all print jobs matching the user name and password you entered.
The print jobs matching the password you entered appear on the screen. You can then choose to print or delete jobs
matching the password you entered. (See "Printing the Stored Jobs" for more information.)
Deleting Stored Jobs
With Secure Print, a job that has been stored will be deleted after printing or deleted at a designated time if entered on
the operator panel.
For other jobs, these jobs remain stored until you delete them on the operator panel.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Printer Settings
Printing a Printer Settings Page
Using the Operator Panel to Change Printer Settings
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change Printer Settings
Resetting Defaults
You can change most printer settings from your software program. If your printer is attached to the network, you can
change settings from the Dell ™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
type the printer's IP address in your web browser. To find your printer's IP address, see "Printing a Printer Settings Page."
Settings from the software program update the default printer settings for the printer. Settings from the printer driver
only apply to the job you are sending to the printer.
If you cannot change a setting from your software program, use the operator panel or the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool. Changing a printer setting from the operator panel or the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool makes that
setting the user default.
Printing a Printer Settings Page
You can verify the detailed printer settings by printing a printer settings page.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Printer Settings is displayed. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
4. Select Reports.
5. Click the Start button in the Printer Settings.
The printer settings page is printed.
Using the Operator Panel to Change Printer Settings
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the operator panel.
When you first enter the menus from the operator panel, you see a bullet next to a value in the menus.
This bullet indicates the factory default menu setting. These settings are the original printer settings.
Factory defaults may vary for different countries.
When you select a new setting from the operator panel, a bullet appears next to the setting to identify it as the current
user default menu setting.
These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are restored.
To select a new value as a setting:
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
or
button until the desired menu is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
3. Press
or
button until the desired menu or menu item is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
If the selection is a menu, the menu is opened and the first printer setting in the menu appears.
If the selection is a menu item, the default menu setting for the menu item appears. (The current user
default menu setting has a bullet beside it.)
Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:
A phrase or word to describe a setting
A numerical value that can be changed
An On or Off setting
NOTE: Pressing
and
buttons at the same time will restore the factory default menu settings. Press
(Set) button to return the settings to the factory default menu settings.
4. Press
or
button until the desired value is highlighted.
5. Press
(Set) button.
This enables the setting value, which is indicated by a bullet next to the setting value.
6. Press Cancel or
button to return to the previous menu.
To continue setting other items, select the desired menu. To quit setting new values, press Cancel button.
Driver settings may override changes previously made and may require you to change the operator panel defaults.
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change
Printer Settings
If your printer is connected to the network, you can change the device settings from your web browser. If you are a
network administrator, you can clone the printer settings of one printer to one or all printers on the network.
Type your printer's IP address in your web browser. Choose Printer Settings from the topics list, and then select the
Printer Settings you want to change. To change the paper type and size, choose Tray Settings from the topics list. To
change the ColorTrack settings, choose Print Volume from the topics list and select the Dell ColorTrack tab.
To copy your printer settings to another printer on the network, choose Copy Printer Settings from the topics list, and
then type the other printer's IP address.
If you do not know your printer's IP address, see the printer settings page. To print the printer settings page using the
operator panel:
1. Press Menu button.
2. Ensure Report/List is highlighted, and then press
3. Printer Settings is displayed. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The printer settings page is printed.
Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters, except the parameters for the network,
are reset to their default values.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
4. Press
button until Reset Defaults is highlighted, and then press
5. Start or Cancel message appears on the operator panel. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
6. Turn off the printer, and then on again to apply the settings.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reset Defaults page is displayed.
5. Click Start next to Reset Defaults and restart printer to reset to default values.
The printer is turned off automatically to apply the settings.
Initializing NVRAM for Network Settings
You can initialize the IP address and network-related settings by initializing NVRAM for Network settings.
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
3. Ensure Network is highlighted, and then press
4. Press
(Set) button.
button until Reset Wireless or Reset LAN is highlighted, and then press
5. Start or Cancel message appears on the operator panel. Press
6. Turn off the printer, and then on again to apply the settings.
Back to Contents Page
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
Back to Contents Page
Understanding the Tool Box Menus
The Tool Box allows you to diagnose the printer settings.
NOTE: A Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings on Tool Box when Panel Lock is
set on the printer. In this case, input the password you specified, and click OK to apply the settings.
NOTE: For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer Software."
Chart Print
Purpose:
To output various charts that can be used for the printer's diagnosis.
Values:
Pitch
Configuration
Chart
Clicking Pitch Configuration Chart button outputs full halftone pages for yellow, magenta, cyan,
and black. Also outputs pages to check the pitch. The output report contains five pages and the paper
size is A4 or Letter.
Ghost
Configuration
Chart
Clicking Ghost Configuration Chart button outputs a chart to check for ghost printing. The output
report contains one page and the paper size is A4 or Letter.
4 Colors
Configuration
Chart
Clicking 4 Colors Configuration Chart button outputs bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black
with varying density. The output report contains one page and the paper size is A4 or Letter.
MQ Chart
Clicking MQ Chart button outputs a chart to confirm the banding. The output report contains two
pages and the paper size is A4 or Letter.
Alignment
Chart
Clicking Alignment Chart button outputs a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on
the paper. The output report contains one page and the paper size is A4 or Letter.
Drum Refresh
Configuration
Chart
Clicking Drum Refresh Configuration Chart button outputs a chart to check the light fatigue of the
drum cartridge. The output report contains one page and the paper size is A4 or Letter.
Environment Sensor Info
Purpose:
To output the printer's internal environment sensor information to Result by pressing the Get Environment Sensor
Info button.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Understanding the Printer Menus
Report/List
Admin Menu
Tray Settings
Print Menu
Panel Lock
When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of users, the access to the Admin Menu menus
can be limited. This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change a printer user default that
has been set by the administrator. In this case, you can access the Stored Document, and Tray Settings menus only.
However, you can use your printer driver to override printer user defaults and select settings for individual print jobs.
To complete print jobs, you may also need to modify tray settings.
Report/List
Use the Report/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.
Printer Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of installed print memory, and the
status of printer supplies.
Panel Settings
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.
PCL Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.
See also:
"Understanding Fonts", "Printing a Font Sample List."
PCL Macro List
Purpose:
To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro.
PS Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PostScript fonts.
See also:
"Understanding Fonts", "Printing a Font Sample List."
Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the print jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.
Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
Print Meter
Purpose:
To print the reports for the total number of pages printed. When printed using either the printer control panel or Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool, the report will be titled Print Volume Report.
Color Test Page
Purpose:
To print a page for testing colors.
Stored Document
Purpose:
To print a list of all files that are stored for Secure Print and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
NOTE: The Stored Document is displayed only when the optional hard disk, or memory module is installed on the
printer and RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled.
Admin Menu
Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.
Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or wireless
network.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Ethernet
Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after the printer
is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto*
Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.
10Base Half
Uses 10 base-T half-duplex.
10Base Full
Uses 10 base-T full-duplex.
100Base Half
Uses 100 base-TX half-duplex.
100Base Full
Uses 100 base-TX full-duplex.
1000Base Full Uses 1000 base-T full-duplex.
Status
Purpose:
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. Any change cannot be made on the operator panel to improve
the status of the wireless connection.
Values:
Good
Indicates good signal strength.
Acceptable
Indicates marginal signal strength.
Low
Indicates insufficient signal strength.
No Reception Indicates that no signal is received.
NOTE: This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wired network.
Wireless Setup
Purpose:
To configure the wireless network interface.
Values:
Enter
Network
(SSID)
Specify a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.
Select when you configure the wireless setting through the access point such as a wireless
router.
Manual
Setup
Infrastructure
No
Security
Specify No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying a security
method from WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA-PSK-AES.
WEP Key
Entry
Specify the WEP 64bit Key to use through the wireless network. Up to 10
hexadecimal characters can be entered.
(64Bit)
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key
Key
3, and WEP Key 4.
WEP Key
Entry
Specify the WEP 128bit Key to use through the wireless network. Up to 26
hexadecimal characters can be entered.
(128Bit)
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key
Key
3, and WEP Key 4.
WPA-PSKTKIP
Infrastructure
WPA2PSK-AES
Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of WPA-PSKTKIP.
Pass
Phrase
Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 only
when WPA-PSK-TKIP is selected for Encryption.
Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of WPA2-PSKAES.
Pass
Phrase
Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 only
when WPA-PSK-AES is selected for Encryption.
Select to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as a wireless router.
Manual
Setup
Ad-hoc
Push
Button
Control
WPS
PIN Code
No
Security
Select to configure the wireless setting without specifying the security method
from WEP.
WEP Key
Entry
Specify the WEP 64bit Key to use through the wireless network. Up to 10
hexadecimal characters can be entered.
(64Bit)
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key
Key
3, and WEP Key 4.
WEP Key
Entry
Specify the WEP 128bit Key to use through the wireless network. Up to 26
hexadecimal characters can be entered.
(128Bit)
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key
Key
3, and WEP Key 4.
PBC Start
Cancel*
Disables the security method of WPS-PBC.
Start
Configures the wireless setting with the security method of WPS-PBC.
Start
Configuration
Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned automatically by the
printer.
Print PIN
Code
Prints PIN Code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer into your
computer.
NOTE: This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wireless network.
Reset Wireless
Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network settings
are reset to their default values.
NOTE: This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wireless network.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
IP
Mode
Dual Stack*
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
IPv6 Mode
Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.
AutoIP* Automatically sets the IP address.
Get IP
Address
IPv4
IPsec* 1
BOOTP
Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
RARP
Uses RARP to set the IP address.
DHCP
Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Panel
Enables the IP address entered on the operator panel.
IP Address
Sets the IP address allocated to the printer by using the keys on the operator
panel.
Subnet Mask
Sets the subnet mask.
Gateway Address
Sets the gateway address.
Disables IPsec.
* 1 Only displayed when an optional network protocol adapter is installed and IPsec is enabled.
Protocol
Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
LPD
Port9100
IPP
FTP
NetWare
WSD
SNMP
E-Mail Alert
EWS
Bonjour(mDNS)
Telnet
HTTP-SSL/TLS* 1
Enable* Enables the LPD port.
Disable
Disables the LPD port.
Enable* Enables the Port9100 port.
Disable
Disables the Port9100 port.
Enable* Enables the IPP port.
Disable
Disables the IPP port.
Enable* Enables FTP.
Disable
Disables FTP.
Enable* Uses IP for NetWare.
Disable
Does not use IP for NetWare.
Enable* Enables the WSD port.
Disable
Disables the WSD port.
Enable* Enables the UDP.
Disable
Disables the UDP.
Enable* Enables the E-mail Alerts feature.
Disable
Disables the E-mail Alerts feature.
Enable* Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Disable
Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Enable* Enables the Bonjour(mDNS).
Disable
Disables the Bonjour(mDNS).
Enable* Enables the Telnet.
Disable
Disables the Telnet.
Enable* Enables the HTTP-SSL/TLS.
Disable
Disables the HTTP-SSL/TLS.
* 1 This item is displayed only when the self-signed certificate is generated.
IP Filter
Purpose:
To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP
addresses. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
No. n/Address
(n is 1-5.)* 1
Sets the IP address for Filter n.
No. n/Mask
(n is 1-5.)* 1
Sets the address mask for Filter n.
Off*
Disable the IP Filter feature for Filter n.
No. n/Mode (n is 1-5.)* 1 Accept Accepts an access from the specified IP address.
Reject
Rejects an access from the specified IP address.
* 1 This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
IEEE 802.1x
Purpose:
To disable the IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the IEEE 802.1x authentication is enabled.
NOTE: This item is available only when connecting the printer with a wired network.
Reset LAN
Purpose:
To initialize wired network data stored in NV (non-volatile) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the
printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.
Adobe Protocol
Purpose:
To specify PostScript communication protocol for a parallel interface, you can configure the Adobe Protocol settings for
the wired network. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.
Standard Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
BCP
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
TBCP*
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between them
according to the specified control code.
Binary
Used when no special processing is required for data.
Parallel
Use the Parallel menu to change the parallel interface.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Parallel Port
Purpose:
To enable or disable the parallel interface. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Disable
The parallel interface is disabled.
Enable* The parallel interface is enabled.
ECP
Purpose:
To specify the ECP communication mode of the parallel interface. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned
off and then on again.
Values:
Disable
ECP communication mode is disabled.
Enable* ECP communication mode is enabled.
Adobe Protocol
Purpose:
To specify PostScript communication protocol for parallel interface. You can configure the Adobe Protocol settings for
parallel port. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.
Standard Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
BCP
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
TBCP*
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between them
according to the specified control code.
Binary
Used when no special processing is required for data.
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
USB Port
Purpose:
To enable or disable the USB interface. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Disable
The USB interface is disabled.
Enable* The USB interface is enabled.
Adobe Protocol
Purpose:
To specify PostScript communication protocol for USB interface. You can configure the Adobe Protocol settings for USB.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.
Standard Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
BCP
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
TBCP*
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between them
according to the specified control code.
Binary
Used when no special processing is required for data.
System Settings
Use the System Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
PowerSaver Time
Purpose:
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.
Values:
Sleep
Deep Sleep
15 min.*
5-30 min.
15 min.*
1-29 min.
Specifies the time for transition to the power saver time (Sleep) in minutes.
Specifies the time for transition to the power saver time (Deep Sleep) in minutes.
Enter 5 to put the printer in power saver mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy, but
requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you
notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate
with minimum warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for power save mode if you want a balance
between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the
computer or remote fax printer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the
operator panel.
Audio Tones
Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears.
Values:
Control
Panel
Invalid Key
Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
On
Emits a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
On
Emits a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
Machine
Ready
Off* Does not emit a tone when the printer becomes ready.
Job
Completed
Off* Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.
Fault Tone
Alert Tone
Out of Paper
On
On
Emits a tone when the printer becomes ready.
Emits a tone when a job is complete.
Off* Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.
On
Emits a tone when a job ends abnormally.
Off* Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
On
Emits a tone when a problem occurs.
Off* Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
On
Emits a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Off* Does not emit a tone when toner or some other consumable is low.
Low Toner
Alert
On
Emits a tone when toner or some other consumable is low.
Off*
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default settings by
scrolling the loop menu.
On
Emits a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default settings by scrolling the
loop menu.
Base Tone
Fault Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify in seconds the amount of time the printer should cancel for a job stops abnormally. The print job is cancelled if
the time-out time is exceeded.
Values:
Off Disables the fault time-out.
On
60 sec.*
6-300 sec.
Specifies the amount of time the printer cancels for a job stops abnormally.
Job Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify in seconds the amount of time the printer should wait for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is
cancelled if the time-out time is exceeded.
Values:
Off Disables the job time-out.
On
30 sec.*
5-300 sec.
Specifies the amount of time the printer should wait for data to arrive from the computer.
Panel Language
Purpose:
To determine the language of the text on the operator panel screen.
Values:
English*
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands Norsk
Svenska
Auto Log Print
Purpose:
To automatically print a log of completed jobs after every 20 jobs.
Values:
Off* Does not automatically output a log of completed jobs.
On
Automatically outputs a log of completed jobs.
Print logs can also be printed using the Report/List menu.
NOTE: Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu.
Print ID
Purpose:
To specify a location where the user ID is printed.
Values:
Off*
Does not print the user ID.
Top Left
Prints the user ID on the top left of the page.
Top Right
Prints the user ID on the top right of the page.
Bottom Left
Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page.
Bottom Right Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page.
NOTE: When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.
Print Text
Purpose:
To specify whether the printer outputs PDL data, which is not supported by the printer, as text when the printer receives
it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
Values:
On* Prints the received data as text data.
Off
Does not print the received data.
Banner Sheet
Purpose:
To specify the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded. This feature is
available for the PCL driver but is not available for the PS driver.
Values:
Insert Position
Off*
Does not print the banner sheet.
Front
Inserted before the first page of every copy.
Back
Inserted after the last page of every copy.
Front & Back Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every copy.
Specify Tray
Tray 1*
The banner sheet is loaded in the first tray from the top.
Tray 2* 1
The banner sheet is loaded in the second tray from the top.
Tray 3* 1
The banner sheet is loaded in the third tray from the top.
Tray 4* 2
The banner sheet is loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 5* 2
The banner sheet is loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
MPF
The banner sheet is loaded in multipurpose feeder (MPF).
* 1 This item is displayed only when an optional 550-sheet feeder or 1100-sheet feeder is installed on the printer.
* 2 This item is displayed only when an optional 1100-sheet feeder is installed on the printer.
RAM Disk
Purpose:
To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print, Proof Print, and Mailbox Print features. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Enable
Allocate memory to the RAM disk file system.
Disable
Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system. Secure Print and Proof Print jobs will abort and be
recorded to the job log.
500MB*
501000MB
Specifies the amount of memory to allocate to the RAM disk file system. (50 MB step)
NOTE: The RAM Disk menu is displayed only when memory module is installed on the printer.
NOTE: Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu.
Date & Time
Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:
Set Date
Specifies the date of the printer with the date format; yy/mm/dd,
mm/dd/yy, or dd/mm/yy.
Set Time
Specifies the time of the printer on 12 Hour Clock or 24 Hour Clock.
Date
Format
dd/mm/yy*
Specifies the date format; dd/mm/yy.
yy/mm/dd
Specifies the date format; yy/mm/dd.
mm/dd/yy
Specifies the date format; mm/dd/yy.
Time
Format
12 Hour Clock
Specifies the date format; 12 Hour Clock.
24 Hour* Clock
Specifies the date format; 24 Hour Clock.
Time
Zone
UTC -12:00
UTC -03:30
UTC +04:00
UTC +09:00
UTC -11:00
UTC -03:00
UTC +04:30
UTC +09:30
UTC -10:00
UTC -02:00
UTC +05:00
UTC +10:00
UTC -09:00
UTC -01:00
UTC +05:30
UTC +11:00
UTC -08:00
UTC 00:00*
UTC +05:45
UTC +12:00
UTC -07:00
UTC +01:00
UTC +06:00
UTC +13:00
UTC -06:00
UTC +02:00
UTC +06:30
UTC -05:00
UTC +03:00
UTC +07:00
UTC -04:00
UTC +03:30
UTC +08:00
Substitute Tray
Purpose:
To specify whether or not to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the
paper size settings for the current job.
Values:
Off
No tray size substitute accepted.
Larger Size
Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of
nearest size.
Nearest
Size*
Substitutes paper of nearest size.
MPF Feed
Substitutes paper from the MPF.
mm/inch
Purpose:
To specify the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.
Values:
millimeter (mm) Selects millimeter as the default measurement unit.
inch (")
Selects inch as the default measurement unit.
NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on other settings, such as Country and Document Size.
Set Available Time
Purpose:
To specify the time period when printing is available.
Values:
Off* Does not specify the time period when printing is available.
Specifies the time period when printing is available.
On
Start Time
Specifies the start time of the time period when printing is available.
End Time
Specifies the end time of the time period when printing is available.
Recurrence Specifies the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Data Encryption
Purpose:
To disable or enable data encryption when using the printer.
Values:
Encryption
Off*
Disables to encrypt the data.
On
Enables to encrypt the data.
Encryption Key Sets a key that is required to encrypt.
NOTE: You can enter only characters from 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, and NULL values for encryption key.
HDD Overwrite Mode
Purpose:
To select to overwrite the hard disk drive and the number of times you can overwrite the disk.
Values:
Off*
Disables to overwrite the hard disk drive.
1Time
Overwrites the hard disk drive once.
3Times Overwrites the hard disk drive 3 times.
NOTE: This item is available only when the optional hard disk drive is installed.
Secure Job Expiration
Purpose:
To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk drive.
Values:
Expiration
Mode
Expiration
Time
Recurrence
Weekly
Settings
Monthly
Settings
Off*
Does not specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM
disk or the hard disk drive.
On
Specifies the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or
the hard disk drive.
Specifies the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk drive.
Daily
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk drive
daily.
Weekly*
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk drive
weekly.
Monthly
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk drive
monthly.
Monday*
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on
Mondays.
Tuesday
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on
Tuesdays.
Wednesday
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on
Wednesdays.
Thursday
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on
Thursdays.
Friday
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on
Fridays.
Saturday
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on
Saturdays.
Sunday
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on
Sundays.
1 Day*
Specifies to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk or the hard disk on the
first day of the month.
2-28 Day
Specifies the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk
or the hard disk.
NOTICE: This item is available only when the RAM disk is on or the optional hard disk is installed.
ColorTrack Mode
Purpose:
To specify which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.
Values:
Off*
Enables to print the data with no authentication information.
Internal Mode Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the internal server.
External Mode Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the external server.
No Account User Print
Purpose:
To specify whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information.
Values:
Off*
Rejects printing the data with no authentication.
On* 1
Permits printing the data with no authentication.
* 1 Set No Account User Password using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
ColorTrack Error Report
Purpose:
To specify whether to print the error report on the ColorTrack.
Values:
Off* Not print the content of a printer output error for a ColorTrack.
On
Print the content of a printer output error for a ColorTrack.
Letterhead Duplex Mode
Purpose:
To enable or disable duplex printing when using letterhead paper.
Values:
Disable* Disables duplex printing for letterhead paper.
Enable
Enables duplex printing for letterhead paper.
Low Toner Alert Msg
Purpose:
To turn Off or On the alert message when toner is low.
Values:
Off
Shows no alert message when the toner is low.
On* Shows the alert message when the toner is low.
Job Offset
Purpose:
To identify one paper set from another set by offsetting the output paper.
Values:
Off*
Disables to offset the output paper.
Offset per Set
Offsets each copy before printing the next copy.
Offset per Job Offsets each copy per paper job you specify.
NOTE: This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
Banner Sheet Offset
Purpose:
To specify whether to offset the output paper, and insert a banner sheet before the first page of each copy.
Values:
Off* Disables to insert the banner sheet after offsetting the output paper.
On
Enables to insert the banner sheet after offsetting the output paper.
NOTE: This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
Job Offset of Staple
Purpose:
To offset the output paper, and specify whether to staple each copy.
Values:
Off
Disables to staple each copy after offsetting the output paper.
Offset per Set* Enables to staple each copy after offsetting the output paper.
Offset per Job
Enables to staple per paper job after offsetting the output paper.
NOTE: This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
Stapler Cart. Empty
Purpose:
To specify whether to continue a print job when the stapler cartridge is empty.
Values:
Not Continue* Stops the print job when the stapler cartridge is empty.
Continue
Continues the print job when the stapler cartridge is empty.
NOTE: This item is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
Power On Wizard
Purpose:
To perform initial setup for the printer.
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize the NV (non-volatile) memory, configure the plain paper quality adjustment
settings, and configure the security settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
F/W Version
Purpose:
To display the printer's firmware version.
Service Tag
Purpose:
To display the printer's service tag.
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify paper density settings.
Values:
Plain
Label
Normal*
Light
Normal*
Light
Adjust BTR
NOTICE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller (BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative
values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
Values:
Plain
(60 to 90 gsm)
0*
-6 - +6
0*
Plain Thick
(80/90 to 105 gsm) -6 - +6
Transparency
0*
-6 - +6
Covers
(106 to 163 gsm)
0*
Covers Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
0*
Label
-6 - +6
-6 - +6
0*
-6 - +6
Coated
(106 to 163 gsm)
0*
Coated Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
0*
Envelope
Recycled
-6 - +6
-6 - +6
0*
-6 - +6
0*
-6 - +6
Adjust Fuser
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To lower the temperature, set negative values. To
increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower the
temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
Values:
Plain
(60 to 90 gsm)
0*
-6 - +6
0*
Plain Thick
(80/90 to 105 gsm) -6 - +6
Transparency
0*
-6 - +6
Covers
(106 to 163 gsm)
0*
Covers Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
0*
Label
-6 - +6
-6 - +6
0*
-6 - +6
Coated
(106 to 163 gsm)
0*
Coated Thick
(164 to 216 gsm)
0*
Envelope
Recycled
-6 - +6
-6 - +6
0*
-6 - +6
0*
-6 - +6
Auto Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Values:
On* Automatically performs color registration adjustment.
Off
Does not automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Color Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To specify whether to manually perform color registration adjustment.
Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required such as when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is
moved.
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to
Off.
Values:
Auto
Correct
Automatically performs color registration correction.
Prints a color registration chart. The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and
ColorRegi cyan lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next to the straightest lines for each of
Chart
the three colors. If the value for the straightest line is 0, color registration adjustment is not required. If the
value for the straightest line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under Enter Number.
0*
LeftYellow
-5 +5
0*
LeftMagenta
-5 +5
Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Left Yellow.
Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Left
Magenta.
0*
LeftCyan
Enter
Number
-5 +5
Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Left Cyan.
0*
RightYellow
-5 +5
0*
RightMagenta -5 +5
Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Right Yellow.
Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Right
Magenta.
0*
RightCyan
-5 +5
Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Right Cyan.
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed
by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTICE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining
toner, etc.
Values:
0m*
1000m
2000m Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
3000m
4000m
Initialize PrintMeter
Purpose:
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize the NV (non-volatile) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu
parameters, except the parameters for the network, are reset to their default values.
Clear Storage
Purpose:
To clear all files stored as Secure Print, Mailbox Print, Proof Print and Stored Print in the RAM disk or the optional hard
disk.
Values:
All Clear
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Mailbox Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk or the optional
hard disk.
Secure
Document
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print and Mailbox Print in the RAM disk or the optional hard disk.
Stored
Document
Clears all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk or the optional hard disk.
NOTE: This item is available only when the RAM disk is on or the optional hard disk is installed.
Format HDD
Purpose:
To initialize the optional hard disk.
NOTE: The Format HDD menu is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed on your printer.
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To specify whether or not to use another manufacturer's toner cartridge.
NOTE: Before you use another manufacture's toner cartridge, be sure to restart the printer.
NOTICE: Use of a non-Dell toner cartridge may result in some of the printer's functions to be unavailable, a
reduction in print quality, or deterioration of printer's reliability. Use of a new Dell brand toner cartridge is
recommended for your printer. The Dell warranty does not cover any problems caused by the use of any accessory,
part, or component that is not supplied by Dell.
Values:
Off* Does not use another manufacturer's toner cartridge.
On
Uses another manufacturer's toner cartridge.
PCL
Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Paper Tray
Purpose:
To specify the input tray.
Values:
Auto*
Automatically selects a tray according to the paper size and type settings of the printing job.
Tray 1
The paper is fed from the first tray from the top.
Tray 2* 1
The paper is fed from the second tray from the top.
Tray 3* 1
The paper is fed from the third tray from the top.
Tray 4* 2
The paper is fed from the fourth tray from the top.
Tray 5* 2
The paper is fed from the fifth tray from the top.
MPF
The paper is fed from the MPF.
* 1 This item is displayed only when an optional 550-sheet feeder or 1100-sheet feeder is installed on the printer.
* 2 This item is displayed only when an optional 1100-sheet feeder is installed on the printer.
Paper Size
Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values:
A4* 1
B5
8.5x13"
Executive
DL
Envelope #10
A5
Letter* 1
Legal
Monarch
C5
X Size
Custom Size
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
297 mm*/11.7 inch*
Y Size
127 - 355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Specifies the length of the custom size paper.
*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.
NOTE: Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
Orientation
Purpose:
To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Values:
Portrait*
Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.
Landscape Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.
2 Sided
Purpose:
To set duplexing as the default for all print jobs. (Select Duplex from the printer driver to duplex only specific jobs.)
Values:
2 Sided
Print
Binding
Edge
Off*
Prints on one side of the paper.
On
Prints on both sides of the paper.
Flip Long
Edge*
Assumes binding along the long edge of the page. (Left edge for portrait orientation and top
edge for landscape orientation)
Flip Short
Edge
Assumes binding along the short edge of the page. (Top edge for portrait orientation and left
edge for landscape orientation)
Font
Purpose:
To specify the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.
Values:
CG Times
CG Times It
CG Times Bd
CG Times BdIt
Univers Md
Univers MdIt
Univers Bd
Univers BdIt
Univers MdCd
Univers MdCdIt
Univers BdCd
Univers BdCdIt
AntiqueOlv
AntiqueOlv It
AntiqueOlv Bd
CG Omega
CG Omega It
CG Omega Bd
CG Omega BdIt
GaramondAntiqua Garamond Krsv
Garamond Hlb
GaramondKrsvHlb Courier*
Courier It
Courier Bd
Courier BdIt
LetterGothic
LetterGothic It
LetterGothic Bd
Albertus Md
Albertus XBd
Clarendon Cd
Coronet
Marigold
Arial
Arial It
Arial Bd
Arial BdIt
Times New
Times New It
Times New Bd
Times New BdIt
Symbol
Wingdings
Line Printer
Times Roman
Times It
Times Bd
Times BdIt
Helvetica
Helvetica Ob
Helvetica Bd
Helvetica BdOb
CourierPS
CourierPS Ob
CourierPS Bd
CourierPS BdOb
SymbolPS
Palatino Roman
Palatino It
Palatino Bd
Palatino BdIt
ITCBookman Lt
ITCBookman LtIt
ITCBookmanDm
ITCBookmanDm It HelveticaNr
HelveticaNr Ob
HelveticaNr Bd
HelveticaNrBdOb
N C Schbk Roman
N C Schbk It
N C Schbk Bd
N C Schbk BdIt
ITC A G Go Bk
ITC A G Go BkOb
ITC A G Go Dm
ITC A G Go DmOb
ZapfC MdIt
ZapfDingbats
Symbol Set
Purpose:
To specify a symbol set for a specified font.
Values:
ROMAN-8* ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
ISO L6
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-775
PC-850
PC-852
PC-1004
PC-8 TK
WIN L1
WIN L2
WIN L5
DESKTOP
PS TEXT
MC TEXT
MS PUB
MATH-8
PS MATH
PI FONT
LEGAL
ISO-4
ISO-6
ISO-11
ISO-15
ISO-17
ISO-21
ISO-60
ISO-69
WIN 3.0
WINBALT
SYMBOL
WINGDINGS DNGBTSMS
Font Size
Purpose:
To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Values:
12.00*
4.00 - 50.00
Specify the values in increments of 0.25.
Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.
NOTE: The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.
See also:
"Pitch and Point Size."
Font Pitch
Purpose:
To specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Values:
10.00*
6.00-24.00
Specify the value in increments of 0.01.
Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For nonscalable monospaced fonts,
the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
NOTE: The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or monospaced fonts.
See also:
"Pitch and Point Size."
Form Line
Purpose:
To set the number of lines in a page.
Values:
64* 1
Specify the value in increments of 1.
5-128
* 1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.
The printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the Form Line and Orientation
menu items. Select the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing Form Line.
See also:
"Orientation."
Quantity
Purpose:
To set the default print quantity. (Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the printer driver. Values
selected from the printer driver always override values selected from the operator panel.)
Values:
1*
1-999
Specify the value in increments of 1.
Image Enhancement
Purpose:
To specify whether to perform the image enhancement feature. Image enhancement is a feature that makes the boundary
line between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.
Values:
Off
Disables the Image Enhancement feature.
On* Enables the Image Enhancement feature.
Hex Dump
Purpose:
To help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in
hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Values:
Disable* Disables the Hex Dump feature.
Enable
Enables the Hex Dump feature.
Draft Mode
Purpose:
To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.
Values:
Disable* Does not print in the draft mode.
Enable
Prints in the draft mode.
LineTermination
Purpose:
To add the line termination commands.
Values:
Off*
The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-LF
The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-CR
The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
CR-XX
The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
Default Color
Purpose:
To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job which does not specify a print mode.
Value:
Black* Prints in the black and white mode.
Color
Prints in the color mode.
PostScript
Use the PostScript menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript emulation printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
PS Error Report
Purpose:
To specify whether the printer outputs error contents for a PostScript error. The change becomes effective after the
printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off
Discards the print job without printing an error message.
On* Prints an error message before it discards the job.
NOTE: This instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.
PS Job Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify the execution time for one PostScript job. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then
on again.
Values:
Off* Job time-out does not occur.
On
1-900 min. A PostScript error occurs if processing is not completed after the specified time.
PaperSelectMode
Purpose:
To specify the way to select the tray for PostScript mode. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and
then on again.
Values:
Auto*
The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.
Select from Tray The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular Post Script printers.
Default Color
Purpose:
To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job which does not specify a print mode.
Value:
Black
Prints in the black and white mode.
Color* Prints in the color mode.
Panel Settings
Use the Panel Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being changed
accidentally.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
See also:
"Panel Lock."
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To limit access to the menus.
Values:
Disable* Does not limit access to the menus.
Enable
Limits access to the menus.
New Password
Purpose:
To set a password to limit access to the menus.
Values:
0000*
0000-9999
Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu and Report/List.
Re-enter Password
Purpose:
To re-enter your password for confirmation.
Login Error
Purpose:
To specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when logging in as administrator in the Admin Menu and
Report/List.
Values:
Off The administrator cannot access Admin Menu and Report/List. after he fails to log in.
On
5 times*
1 - 10 times
Sets the error time when the administrator logs in Admin Menu and Report/List.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to define the print media loaded in each tray.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
MPF
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the MPF.
Values:
Plain (60 to 90 gsm)*
Plain Thick (80/90 to 105 gsm)
Transparency
Covers (106 to 163 gsm)
Covers Thick (164 to 216 gsm)
Label
Coated (106 to 163 gsm)
Coated Thick (164 to 216 gsm)
Envelope
Paper
Type
Recycled
Letter Head
Plain S2 (60 to 90 gsm)* 1
Plain Thick S2 (80/90 to 105 gsm)* 1
Covers S2 (106 to 163 gsm)* 1
Covers Thick S2 (164 to 216 gsm)* 1
Coated S2 (106 to 163 gsm)* 1
Coated Thick S2 (164 to 216 gsm)* 1
Recycled S2* 1
Use Driver Settings*
A4
A5
B5
Letter
8.5x13"
Legal
Paper
Size
Executive
Monarch
DL
C5
Envelope #10
X Size
Custom
Size
Y Size
Panel
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
297 mm*/11.7 inch*
127 - 355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
Specifies the length of the custom size paper.
Specified
MPF
Mode
Stop printing and show an error on the operator panel if the paper specified from the printer
driver does not match the paper configured for the MPF from the operator panel.
Driver
Continue to print even if the paper specified from the printer driver does not match the paper
Specified* configured for the MPF from the operator panel.
Display
Popup
On*
Specifies the size and type of paper loaded in the MPF. This item is available only when Panel
Specified is selected for MPF Mode.
Off
Size and type of paper loaded in the MPF is not specified. This item is available only when Panel
Specified is selected for MPF Mode.
* 1 S2 indicates papers whose one side has been printed already.
NOTE: For the tray 1, optional 550-sheet feeder, or optional 1100-sheet feeder setting paper size is not required.
These trays detect the paper size automatically. For more information on supported paper size for the standard and
optional trays, see "Supported Paper Sizes."
Use this menu item to:
Optimize print quality for the specified paper.
Select paper source through your software program by selecting type and size.
Automatically link trays. The printer automatically links any trays containing the same type and size of paper, if you
have set the Paper Type to the correct values.
Tray 1
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the top tray.
Values:
Plain(60 to 90 gsm)*
Plain Thick (80/90 to 105 gsm)
Transparency
Covers(106 to 163 gsm)
Covers Thick (164 to 216g sm)
Paper Type Label
Coated (106 to 163 gsm)
Coated Thick (164 to 216 gsm)
Envelope
Recycled
Letter Head
Auto*
Monarch
DL
C5
Paper Size
Envelope #10
X Size
Custom Size
Y Size
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
297 mm*/11.7 inch*
127 - 355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
Specifies the length of the custom size paper.
Tray 2
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the second tray from the top.
Values:
Plain(60 to 90 gsm)*
Plain Thick (80/90 to 105 gsm)
Paper Type
Covers (106 to 163 gsm)
Covers Thick (164 to 216g sm)
Recycled
Letter Head
Auto*
Monarch
DL
C5
Paper Size
Envelope #10
X Size
Custom Size
Y Size
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
297 mm*/11.7 inch*
127 - 355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
Specifies the length of the custom size paper.
Tray 3
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the third tray from the top.
Values:
Plain (60 to 90 gsm)*
Plain Thick (80/90 to 105 gsm)
Paper Type
Covers (106 to 163 gsm)
Covers Thick (164 to 216g sm)
Recycled
Letter Head
Auto*
Monarch
DL
C5
Paper Size
Envelope #10
X Size
Custom Size
Y Size
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
297 mm*/11.7 inch*
127 - 355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
Specifies the length of the custom size paper.
Tray 4
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the fourth tray from the top.
Values:
Plain (60 to 90 gsm)*
Plain Thick (80/90 to 105 gsm)
Paper Type
Covers (106 to 163 gsm)
Covers Thick (164 to 216g sm)
Recycled
Letter Head
Auto*
Monarch
DL
C5
Paper Size
Envelope #10
X Size
Custom Size
Y Size
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
297 mm*/11.7 inch*
127 - 355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
Specifies the length of the custom size paper.
Tray 5
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the fifth tray from the top.
Values:
Plain (60 to 90 gsm)*
Plain Thick (80/90 to 105 gsm)
Paper Type
Covers (106 to 163 gsm)
Covers Thick (164 to 216g sm)
Recycled
Letter Head
Auto*
Monarch
DL
C5
Paper Size
Envelope #10
X Size
Custom Size
Y Size
210 mm*/8.3 inch*
77 - 215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
297 mm*/11.7 inch*
127 - 355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Specifies the width of the custom size paper.
Specifies the length of the custom size paper.
Print Menu
The Print Menu provides document storing services with Secure Print, Private Mailbox Print, Public Mailbox Print, and
Proof Print.
NOTE: The Print Menu is displayed only when the RAM disk is set to on or the optional hard disk is installed.
Secure Print
Purpose:
To specify printing and deleting the stored document.
Values:
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Select User
ID
All
Document
Print and Delete Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
document n
Print and Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
(n is number)
Delete
Delete
Deletes all documents from print memory.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Private Mailbox
Purpose:
To specify printing and deleting the stored document.
Values:
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Print and Delete Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
Select User
ID
All
Document
document n
(n is number)
Print
Prints all documents and save them in memory.
Delete
Deletes all documents from print memory.
Print and Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
Print
Prints the specified document and save it in memory.
Delete
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Public Mailbox
Purpose:
To specify printing and deleting the stored document.
Values:
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Print and Delete Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
Select User
ID
All
Document
document n
(n is number)
Print
Prints all documents and save them in memory.
Delete
Deletes all documents from print memory.
Print and Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
Print
Prints the specified document and save it in memory.
Delete
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Proof Print
Purpose:
To specify printing and deleting the stored document.
Values:
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Print and Delete Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
Select User
ID
All
Document
document n
(n is number)
Print
Prints all documents and save them in memory.
Delete
Deletes all documents from print memory.
Print and Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
Print
Prints the specified document and save it in memory.
Delete
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Panel Lock
This feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing settings made by the administrator. For regular printing,
items can be selected from the menu and printer settings remain unchanged. For regular printing, items can be
configured using the printer driver.
NOTE: Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray Settings menus.
Enabling the Panel Lock
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then press
4. Panel Lock is displayed. Press
5. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button until Enable is highlighted, and then press
6. Enter the new password, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
7. Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then press
The password has been changed.
(Set) button.
NOTE: If you forget your password, turn off the printer. Then, while holding Menu button, turn on the printer.
Perform steps 6 to 7 to reset the password. This will recover the factory default panel password.
NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, follow the following steps. Perform steps 1 and 2.
button until Change Password is highlighted, and then press
Press
change the password. This will change the password.
(Set) button. Perform steps 6 and 7 to
NOTE: If Panel Lock is Enable, the factory-default panel password is 0000.
See also:
"Change Password."
Disabling the Panel Lock
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Enter the password, and then press
4. Press
(Set) button.
button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then press
5. Panel Lock is displayed. Press
6. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button until Disable is highlighted, and then press
7. Enter the current password, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
8. Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then press
The setting has been changed.
Back to Contents Page
(Set) button.
Back to Contents Page
Understanding Your Printer Software
Printer Settings Utility
Tool Box
Use the Drivers and Utilities CD that came with your printer to install a combination of software programs, depending on
your operating system.
The following software programs can only operate on Windows. They cannot operate on Macintosh, UNIX, or Linux.
Status Window
The Status Window alerts you when an error or warning occurs, for example, when a paper jam occurs or toner is
running low.
You can specify when or whether the Status Window appears in the Printing Status Window Properties dialog box.
Open this dialog box from the start menu or by right-clicking the Status Monitor Console icon.
The available selections are as below.
Value
Function
Activate window
during printing
Activates the Status Window whenever printing. The window closes
automatically when all print jobs finish or are cancelled.
Activate window only
Activates the Status Window only when an error occurs during
when an error occurs* printing. The window closes automatically when the error is cleared.
Do not activate
automatically
Does not automatically activate the Status Window.
* factory default setting
You can also check toner level, quantity of paper remaining, and status of other consumables for the local and network
printer.
Status Monitor Console
Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple Status Window.
Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name to open a Status Window for a
particular printer.
The Status Monitor Console displays the Status Window for local and network connections.
Dell Supplies Management System™
You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the printing status window (for the local printer
only), the All Programs menu, or the desktop icon. You can also launch it from the Status Window when a toner error
occurs.
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.
1. Click start® All Programs® Dell Printers® Additional Color Laser Software® Dell Supplies Management
System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2. Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3. If you are ordering from the Web:
a. When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two-way communication, a window that
prompts you to type the Service Tag appears. Type your Dell printer Service Tag in the field provided.
Your Service Tag is located inside the front cover of your printer.
b. Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list.
c. Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
4. If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the Order by Phone heading.
User Setup Disk Creating Tool
The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Drivers and
Utilities CD and the printer drivers located on the Drivers and Utilities CD are used to create driver installation packages
that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and
other data for things such as:
Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)
Watermarks
Font references
If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings to multiple computers running the same operating system,
create a setup disk in a floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have created will reduce
the amount of work required when installing the printer driver.
Install in advance the Dell™ 5130cdn Color Laser Printer printer driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to
be created.
The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers running the
same operating system. Create a separate setup disk for different types of operating systems.
Software Update
The firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell Support website located at support.dell.com.
Printer Settings Utility
Using the Quick Launch Utility window, you can open Status Window, Updater, and Troubleshooting.
When you install the Dell software, the Quick Launch Utility is automatically installed.
For information about installing the software, see "Setting Up for Shared Printing."
To open the Quick Launch Utility window:
1. Click start ® All Programs® Dell Printers® Additional Color Laser Software ® Quick Launch Utility.
The Quick Launch Utility dialog box opens.
2. The Quick Launch Utility window provides three buttons; Status Window, Updater, and Troubleshooting.
To exit, click the X button at the top-right of the window.
For details, click the Help button of each application.
Status Window
The Status Window button opens the Status Window. See "Status Window."
Updater
The Updater button updates the settings for the printer driver, firmware and service software.
Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting button opens the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you to recover problems by yourself.
Tool Box
You can use the Tool Box to diagnose the printer settings. For details on the settings, see "Understanding the Tool Box
Menus."
NOTE: The Tool Box is available only when you connect the printer with USB or network connection.
To start the Tool Box.
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer.
When the Easy Setup Navigator window appears, click the Exit button to close the window.
2. Click start ® Run, and then type D:\Utilities\Tool Box\DLT12DZ.exe (where D is the drive letter of your CD),
and then click OK.
The dialog box prompting you to select the type of connection appears.
3. Select the type of connection between your computer and printer.
For network connection
a. Select Network Connection.
b. Enter the IP address or host name of your printer.
NOTE: The scope ID is necessary when you enter the IPv6 address.
For USB connection
a. Select USB Connection.
b. In the list on the Select Printer screen, select the target printer that you diagnose printer settings for.
4. Click OK.
The Tool Box starts.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Printing Using ColorTrack (External Authentication)
ColorTrack Settings
Setting the Printer Driver
With ColorTrack, you can restrict the number of pages that can be printed per user, specify the users who can print in
color, and restrict the users who can access the printer, based on the user information registered on the external
authentication server or the printer.
To print using ColorTrack, you must set ColorTrack Settings and the printer driver. Also, you must set the external server
with ColorTrack for using an external authentication server. To set the external server, consult your system administrator.
ColorTrack Settings
To print using ColorTrack, configure the following settings.
"Dell ColorTrack"
"Authentication System"
"Kerberos Server"
"LDAP Server"
"LDAP Authentication"
Dell ColorTrack
Specify the authentication method.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Volume.
3. Click the Dell ColorTrack tab.
Select External Mode for ColorTrack Mode.
Check the No Account User Print check box when you permit the printing of data with no authentication
information. If not, remove the check mark from the No Account User Print check box.
Enter the password when the No Account User Print check box is On and External Mode is selected.
Then, re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered.
Check the ColorTrack Error Report check box, if necessary.
4. Click the Apply New settings button, and then turn off the printer to apply the settings.
When Using the Operator Panel
You can specify only the settings of ColorTrack Mode, No Account User Print, and ColorTrack Error Report using
the operator Panel.
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until System Settings is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
4. Press
button until ColorTrack Mode is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
5. Press
button until External Mode is highlighted, and then press
6. Press Cancel or
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button to return to the previous menu.
7. Press
button until No Account User Print is highlighted, and then press
8. Press
button to select Off or On, and then press
9. Press Cancel or
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button to return to the previous menu.
10. Press
button until ColorTrack Error Report is highlighted, and then press
11. Press
button to select Off or On, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
12. Turn off the printer to apply the settings.
ColorTrack Mode
The following two authentication modes are available: the Internal Mode using user information registered on the printer,
and the External Mode using user information registered on an external server. To authenticate on the external
authentication server with External Mode, you need not register user information on the printer. The change becomes
effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
No Account User Print
Specify whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information. This setting is enabled when the printer
is restarted. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
No-account User Password
Specify the password to be used for non-account user using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the password is left
blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on
again.
NOTE: When External Mode is specified and No Account User Print is set to On, you must set a password.
NOTE: When using an LDAP server, you also must set the same password on the server.
Re-enter No-account User Password
Enter the No-account user password again to confirm it.
ColorTrack Error Report
Specify whether to automatically print error-related information if printing using ColorTrack results in an error.
Setup Remote Authentication
Click Setup Remote Authentication Page to display the Authentication System page.
NOTE: This item is displayed only when External Mode is specified.
Authentication System
Specify the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search time-out.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select Authentication System.
Authentication System page is displayed.
Select the authentication system for Authentication System Settings.
Specify the time-out period for Server Response Time-Out.
Specify the time-out period for Search Time-Out.
5. Click the Apply New settings button, and then turn off the printer to apply the settings.
Authentication System Settings
Select the authentication system from the list. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on
again.
Server Response Time-Out
Specify the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the server. Set the time period from 1 up to 75
seconds. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Search Time-Out
Specify the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the server. Set the time period from 5 up to 120
seconds. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Kerberos Server
Specify the settings for the Kerberos Server.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select Kerberos Server.
5. Enter the primary server name or IP address, and the port address in Primary Server Name / IP Address &
Port.
6. Enter the secondary server name or IP address, and the port address in Secondary Server Name / IP Address
& Port if necessary.
7. Enter the domain name in Domain Name.
8. Click the Apply New settings button, and then turn off the printer to apply the settings.
Primary Server Name / IP Address & Port
Specify the primary server name or IP address, and the port address. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
NOTICE: Do not use the same port address as that of another port.
NOTE: The port address must be 88 or between 5,000 and 65,535. The default value is 88.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format for IPv4. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value
between 0 and 255.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format for IPv6. Each section of
"xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value.
Secondary Server Name / IP Address & Port
Specify the secondary server name or IP address, and the port address, as necessary. The change becomes effective after
the printer is turned off and then on again.
NOTICE: Do not use the same port address as that of another port.
NOTICE: Set the secondary server after setting the primary server.
NOTE: The port address must be 88 or between 5,000 and 65,535.The default value is 88.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format for IPv4. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value
between 0 and 255.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format for IPv6. Each section of
"xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value.
Domain Name
Specify the domain name of the Active Directory ® in Domain Name (Realm Name). The change becomes effective after
the printer is turned off and then on again.
NOTE: Specify the domain name with uppercase characters. Depending on your server, an error may occur if you
specify the domain name with lowercase characters.
LDAP Server
Specify the directory server and the authentication method to execute LDAP authentication or to acquire information using
LDAP, and specify the range and attributes for searching.
NOTE: When using LDAPS or certificate verification, you must set the LDAP server or import an external certificate.
For more information, see "Using Digital Certificates."
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select LDAP Server.
Enter the IP address or the host name, and the port address in IP Address / Host Name & Port.
Enter the backup IP address or the host name, and the port address in Backup IP Address / Host Name
& Port.
Confirm the software information for LDAP Server.
Enter a text string in Search Directory Root.
Enter the login name in Login Name.
Enter the password in Password. Then, re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered.
Specify the time-out period for Search Time-Out.
5. Click the Apply New settings button, and then turn off the printer to apply the settings.
Server Information
IP Address / Host Name & Port
Specify the IP address or the host name, and the port address. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned
off and then on again.
NOTICE: Do not use the same port address as that of another port.
NOTE: The port address must be 389, 636 or between 5,000 and 65,535. The default value is 389. When using
LDAPS, normally specify 636.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format for IPv4. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value
between 0 and 255.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format for IPv6. Each section of
"xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value.
Backup IP Address / Host Name & Port
Specify the backup IP address or the host name, and the port address, as necessary. Specify the backup IP address or the
host name, and the port address after specifying the IP Address / Host Name & Port. The change becomes effective
after the printer is turned off and then on again.
NOTICE: Do not use the same port address as that of another port.
NOTICE: Set the backup server after setting the main server.
NOTE: The port address must be 389, 636 or between 5,000 and 65,535. The default value is 389. When using
LDAPS, normally specify 636.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format for IPv4. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value
between 0 and 255.
NOTE: Specify the IP address in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format for IPv6. Each section of
"xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value.
LDAP Server
Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.
Operation Information
Search Directory Root
Specify a text string as the origin of the search when using LDAP communication. The change becomes effective after the
printer is turned off and then on again.
For example: ou=colortrackv3,dc=win2003ad,dc=colortrack.dc=net
Login Name
Specify the login name for accessing the directory server with LDAP authentication. Specify the name of a user with the
authority to update the LDAP server. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Password
Specify the password for accessing the directory server with LDAP authentication. Specify the password of a user with the
authority to update the LDAP server using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the password is left blank (NULL), you
cannot log in to a server. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Re-enter-Password
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Search Time-Out
Specify the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the server. To specify a time-out period for searching,
select Wait, and set the time period from 5 up to 120 seconds. To not specify a time-out period, select the Wait LDAP
Server Limit. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
LDAP Authentication
Specify the LDAP server authentication method.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select LDAP Authentication.
Confirm the authentication method.
When adding a text string to the UserID, specify Enable for Use Added Text String.
When specifying Enable for Use Added Text String, enter the additional text string in Text String Added
to User Name.
5. Click the Apply New settings button, and then turn off the printer to apply the settings.
Authentication Method
Displays the current LDAP authentication method. Direct Authentication executes server authentication with the UserID
and password entered.
Use Added Text String
Specify whether to add a text string to the UserID. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then
on again.
Text String Added to User Name
When using an added string for the user name, specify the text string to be added.
For example: if the user name is "[email protected]", normally you must enter "[email protected]".
However if Use Added Text String is set to Enable, and "@myhost.example.com" is specified in Text String Added to
User Name, only the data "abcde" must be entered with the printer driver, thus simplifying the entry task.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Setting the Printer Driver
To print using ColorTrack, set the printer driver. Once set, the settings of the printer driver are enabled until they are
changed.
1. Open the Properties of the printer driver.
2. Configure the following settings from the Configuration tab.
Dell ColorTrack Mode
Specify whether to allow general users to change settings related to authentication or whether general users must use the
settings configured by the Administrator.
Specify Group Name
Specify the name of the belonging group to use when authenticating. If you specify a group that does not belong,
authentication fails and the data is not printed. Also, the default group is set if Specify Group Name is not specified.
Specify Job Owner
Select Use Login Name to use the user information logged into your PC, and select Enter ID to enter the user name
yourself.
Job Owner Name
Specify the user name to use when authenticating with an external server. You can enter this only when selecting Enter
ID for Specify Job Owner.
Password
Specify the user password to use when authenticating with an external server.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Using Digital Certificates
Managing Certificates
Setting the Features
The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print data or setting data.
This chapter describes how to manage digital certificates as follows.
"Importing a Digital Certificate"
"Setting a Digital Certificate"
"Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate"
"Deleting a Digital Certificate"
"Exporting a Digital Certificate"
NOTE: The external certificate management described above is enabled only when the optional hard disk is
installed and is set to On for Encryption.
NOTE: For information about digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages" and "Digital Certificate
Problem."
Managing Certificates
Preparing
Changing Encryption Setting
Some items are effective only when On is selected for Encryption. Change the encryption setting to On and set a key that
is required to encrypt, if necessary.
NOTICE: All files stored on the optional hard disk are cleared when changing the encryption setting.
NOTE: You can enter only characters from 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, and NULL values for encryption key.
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until System settings is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
4. Press
button until Data Encryption is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
5. Encryption is displayed. Press
6. Press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
button until On is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
7. The cursor is located at the first digit of the encryption key. Press
encryption key.
or
button to enter the numbers for the
8. Press
(Set) button. The cursor moves to the next digit.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to enter all of the digits, and then press
(Set) button.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Settings tab.
4. Select Secure Settings.
5. Click Data Encryption.
The Data Encryption page is displayed.
6. Select the Encryption check box.
7. Enter a key that is required to encrypt.
8. Re-enter the key again to confirm it.
9. Click the Apply New Settings button.
Setting HTTPS Communication
Before managing certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed certificate.
NOTE: Set HTTPS communication after changing the Encryption setting to On.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select SSL/TLS.
5. Click the Generate Self-Signed Certificate button of Machine Digital Certificate. The Generate Self-Signed
Certificate page is displayed.
6. Select the size of public key from the list of Size of Public Key.
7. Specifies the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
8. Click the Generate Signed Certificate button.
9. The Restart Printer button is displayed after generating the self-signed certificate, and then click the Restart
Printer button.
10. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to display the SSL/TLS page after restarting the printer.
11. If the self-signed certificate is set correctly, since the HTTP- SL/TLS Communication column is set to Enable
and a check box is displayed, select Enable.
Importing a Digital Certificate
NOTICE: Before importing a certificate file, back up the certificate file.
NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer.
NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select SSL/TLS.
5. Click the Upload Signed Certificate button of Machine Digital Certificate.
The Upload Signed Certificate page is displayed.
NOTE: The Upload Signed Certificate button is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and
is set to On for encryption.
6. Enter a password.
7. Re-enter the password again to confirm it.
8. Press the Browse button of File Name, and select the file to be imported.
9. Press the Import button to import the certificate.
Setting a Digital Certificate
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select SSL/TLS.
5. Click the Certificate Management button to display the Certificate Management page.
NOTE: The Certificate Management button is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is
set to On for encryption.
6. When setting a Wireless LAN (Server) certificate, select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category.
When setting a certificate of SSL Server, SSL Client, or IPsec, select Local Device.
7. Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.
8. Click the Display the List button to display the Certificate List page.
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, press the Next button to display the next page.
9. Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.
10. Click the Certificate Details button to display the Certificate Details page.
11. Confirm the content, and press the Use This Certificate button at the upper-right corner.
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select SSL/TLS.
5. Click the Certificate Management button to display the Certificate Management page.
NOTE: The Certificate Management button is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is
set to On for encryption.
6. Select the category from the Category list.
7. Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.
8. Click the Display the List button to display the Certificate List page.
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, press the Next button to display the next page.
9. The certificate displayed with an asterisk as "*Valid" in the Validity column is the certificate associated with the
use purpose and actually used.
Deleting a Digital Certificate
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select SSL/TLS.
5. Click the Certificate Management button to display the Certificate Management page.
NOTE: The Certificate Management button is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is
set to On for encryption.
6. Select the category from the Category list.
7. Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.
8. Click the Display the List button to display the Certificate List page.
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, press the Next button to display the next page.
9. Select the certificate to be deleted.
10. Click the Certificate Details button to display the Certificate Details page.
11. To delete the selected certificate, press the Delete button at the upper- right corner.
NOTE: When a certificate is deleted, the features associated with the deleted certificate are disabled. To
delete a certificate being used, either set the feature to OFF in advance or switch the association to another
certificate, and then switch to another operation mode if possible before deleting the certificate.
For an SSL Server, switch to another certificate such as a self-signed certificate.
For an SSL Client, set the LDAP-SSL/TLS setting to OFF.
For IPsec, change the IKE setting to Pre-Shared Key or set the feature to OFF.
For Wireless LAN, change the Wireless Security setting to other than WPA-Enterprise before deleting the
certificate.
Exporting a Digital Certificate
NOTE: Since the secret key is not exported, an imported PKCS#12 format certificate can be exported only as a
PKCS#7 certificate.
1. Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Open the web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2. Select Print Server Settings.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select SSL/TLS.
5. Click the Certificate Management button to display the Certificate Management page.
NOTE: The Certificate Management button is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to
On for encryption.
6. Select the category from the Category list.
7. Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.
Click the Display the List button to display the Certificate List page.
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, press the Next button to display the next page.
8. Select the certificate to be exported.
9. Click the Certificate Details button to display the Certificate Details page.
10. To export the selected certificate, press the Export This Certificate button.
Setting the Features
Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode
1. Import the certificate to be used with IPsec. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."
2. Set the certificate to be used with IPsec. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."
3. Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly in IPsec. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a
Digital Certificate."
4. Select Print Server Settings from the left side of the page.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Select IPsec.
7. Select Enable for Protocol.
8. Select Digital Signature from the IKE list.
9. Set each item, as necessary.
10. Click the Apply New Settings button.
11. After restarting the printer, IPsec communication using digital signatures is enabled. You can execute IPsec
communication (Digital Signature Mode) between the printer and the network device (such as PC) on which the
certificate and IPsec are set identically as on this device.
Setting the SSL-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)
1. Import the certificate to be used with the SSL-use server. For more information, see "Importing a Digital
Certificate."
2. Set the certificate to be used with the SSL-use server. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."
3. Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital
Certificate."
NOTE: Confirm whether the newly set certificate, not the self-signed certificate, is associated.
4. After restarting the printer, the certificate set as described above is used as the server certificate when executing
communication with HTTP/IPP- SSL/TLS.
Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication
1. Displays the SSL/TLS page.
2. Select Enable for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.
3. After restarting the printer, LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication is enabled.
NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
NOTE: When executing the certificate validity of the server and the presentation of the client certificate, see
"Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication" and "Setting Client Certificate for LDAPSSL/TLS Communication."
Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS
Communication
1. Import the root certificate (including intermediate certificate) for the LDAP server certificate. For more information,
see "Importing a Digital Certificate."
NOTE: In the verification of a certificate of the connected server, to automatically search for an imported
certificate and verify the path, the certificate does not need to be associated.
2. Confirm whether the root certificate is correctly imported to the LDAP server. For more information, see
"Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."
3. Select SSL/TLS.
4. Select Enable of Verify Remote Server Certificate.
5. After restarting the printer, the certificate presented by the LDAP server is verified when LDAP-SSL/TLS
communication starts with the LDAP server.
NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
NOTE: This feature is enabled only when Enable is set for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.
NOTE: When the result of verification is NG, communication is not established and an error results.
Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication
1. Import a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."
2. Set a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."
3. Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital
Certificate."
4. After restarting the printer, the LDAP client certificate is presented when LDAP-SSL/TLS communication with the
LDAP server starts. When the LDAP server is set to require a client certificate, the client certificate provided by the
printer is verified by the LDAP server.
NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
NOTE: This feature is enabled only when Enable is set for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise
1. Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."
2. Set the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."
3. Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital
Certificate."
4. Click the Print Server Settings tab.
5. Select Wireless LAN.
6. Select either of the following items from the list of Encryption of Secure Settings.
WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES
WPA-Enterprise-TKIP
7. Set Login Name, EAP-Identity, and Password of WPA-Enterprise.
NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional hard disk is installed and is set to On for encryption.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Understanding Fonts
Typefaces and Fonts
Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts
Resident Fonts
Symbol Sets
Typefaces and Fonts
A font is a set of characters and symbols created with a distinct design. The distinct design is called a typeface. The
typefaces you select add personality to a document. Well-chosen typefaces make a document easier to read.
The printer has numerous resident fonts in PCL 5/PCL 6 and PostScript 3. See "Resident Fonts" for a listing of all resident
fonts.
Weight and Style
Typefaces are often available in different weights and styles. These variations modify the original typeface so you can, for
example, emphasize important words in text or highlight book titles. The different weights and styles are designed to
complement the original typeface.
Weight refers to the thickness of the lines that form the characters. Thicker lines result in darker characters. Some words
commonly used to describe the weight of a typeface are bold, medium, light, black, and heavy.
Style refers to other typeface modifications, such as tilt or character width. Italic and oblique are styles where the
characters are tilted. Narrow, condensed, and extended are three common styles that modify the character widths.
Some fonts combine several weight and style modifications; for example, Helvetica BdOb. A group of several weight and
style variations of a single typeface is called a typeface family. Most typeface families have four variations: regular, italic
(oblique), bold, and bold italic (bold oblique). Some families have more variations, as the following illustration for the
Helvetica typeface family shows:
Pitch and Point Size
The size of a font is specified as either a pitch or point size, depending on whether the font is fixed space or proportional.
In fixed space fonts, each character has the same width. Pitch is used to specify the size of fixed space fonts. It is a
measure of the number of characters that will print in one horizontal inch of type. For example, all 10-pitch fonts print 10
characters per inch (cpi) and all 12-pitch fonts print 12 cpi:
In proportional (or typographic) fonts, every character can have a different width. Since proportional fonts have
characters with different widths, the font size is specified in point size, not pitch. Point size refers to the height of the
characters in the font. A point is defined as 1/72 inch. The characters in a font printed at 24 point will be twice as large as
the characters in the same font printed at 12 point.
The following illustration shows samples of a font printed in different point sizes:
The point size of a font is defined as the distance from the top of the tallest character in the font to the bottom of the
lowest character in the font. Due to the definition of point size, different fonts printed at the same point size may appear
quite different in size. This is because there are other font parameters that affect how the font looks. However, the point
size of a font is an excellent specification of the relative size of a font. The following examples illustrate two very different
proportional fonts at 14 point:
Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts
The printer uses both bitmapped and scalable fonts.
Bitmapped fonts are stored in print memory as predefined patterns of bits that represent a typeface at a specific size,
style, and resolution. The following illustration shows an example of a character from a bitmapped font.
Bitmapped fonts are available in different type styles and point sizes as downloadable fonts.
Scalable fonts (also called outline fonts) are stored as computer programs that define the outlines of the characters in the
font. Each time you print characters from a scalable font, the printer creates a bitmap of the characters at the point size
you choose and saves it temporarily in print memory.
These temporary bitmapped fonts are deleted when you turn off or reset the printer. Scalable fonts provide the flexibility
of printing in many different point sizes.
Your printer uses different scalable font formats for downloading fonts to the printer. PCL 5/PCL 6 uses Intellifont and
TrueType scalable fonts. PostScript 3 uses Type 1 and TrueType scalable fonts. There are thousands of different scalable
fonts available in these different font formats from numerous font suppliers.
If you plan to use many downloadable bitmapped or scalable fonts or if you plan to use many different sizes of scalable
fonts, you may need to purchase additional memory for your printer.
Resident Fonts
Your printer is equipped with resident fonts stored permanently in print memory. Different fonts are available in PCL
5/PCL 6 and PostScript 3. Some of the most popular typefaces, like Courier and TimesNew (PCL 5/PCL 6)/Times New
Roman (PostScript 3), are available for all printer languages.
The following table lists all the fonts resident in your printer. See "Printing a Font Sample List" for instructions on how to
print samples of the fonts. You can select the resident fonts from your software program. You can also select the fonts
from the operator panel if you are using PCL 5.
Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts
PCL 5/PCL 6
PostScript 3
CG Times
Albertus
CG Times It
Albertus Italic
CG Times Bd
Albertus Light
CG Times BdIt
Antique Olive Roman
Univers Md
Antique Olive Italic
Univers MdIt
Antique Olive Bold
Univers Bd
Antique Olive Compact
Univers BdIt
Apple Chancery
Univers MdCd
Arial
Univers MdCdIt
Arial Italic
Univers BdCd
Arial Bold
Univers BdCdIt
Arial Bold Italic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
AntiqueOlv
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
AntiqueOlv It
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
AntiqueOlv Bd
ITC AvantGarde Gothic Demi Oblique
Bodoni Roman
CG Omega
Bodoni Italic
CG Omega It
Bodoni Bold
CG Omega Bd
Bodoni Bold Italic
CG Omega BdIt
Bodoni Poster
Bodoni Poster Compressed
Garamond Antiqua ITC Bookman Light
Garamond Krsv
ITC Bookman Light Italic
Garamond Hlb
ITC Bookman Demi
Garamond KrsvHlb ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Carta
Courier
Chicago
Courier It
Clarendon Roman
Courier Bd
Clarendon Bold
Courier BdIt
Clarendon Light
Cooper Black
LetterGothic
Cooper Black Italic
LetterGothic It
Cooper Gothic 32BC
LetterGothic Bd
Cooper Gothic 33BC
Coronet
Albertus Md
Courier
Albertus XBd
Courier Oblique
Courier Bold
Clarendon Cd
Courier Bold Oblique
Eurostile Medium
Coronet
Eurostile Bold
Eurostile Extended No. 2
Marigold
Eurostile Bold Extended No. 2
Geneva
Arial
Gill Sans
Arial It
Gill Sans Italic
Arial Bd
Gill Sans Bold
Arial BdIt
Gill Sans Bold Italic
Gill Sans Light
TimesNew
Gill Sans Light Italic
TimesNew It
Gill Sans Extra Bold
TimesNew Bd
Gill Sans Condensed
TimesNew BdIt
Gill Sans Condensed Bold
Goudy Oldstyle
Symbol
Goudy Oldstyle Italic
Goudy Bold
Wingdings
Goudy Bold Italic
Goudy Extra Bold
Line Printer
Helvetica
Helvetica Oblique
Times Roman
Helvetica Bold
Times It
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Times Bd
Helvetica Narrow
Times BdIt
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Helvetica Ob
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Bd
Helvetica Condensed Oblique
Helvetica BdOb
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique
CourierPS
Hoefler Text
CourierPS Ob
Hoefler Text Italic
CourierPS Bd
Hoefler Text Black
CourierPS BdOb
Hoefler Text Black Italic
Hoefler Ornaments
SymbolPS
Joanna
Joanna Italic
Palatino Roman
Joanna Bold
Palatino It
Joanna Bold Italic
Palatino Bd
Letter Gothic
Palatino BdIt
Letter Gothic Slanted
Letter Gothic Bold
ITCBookman Lt
Letter Gothic Bold Slanted
ITCBookman LtIt
ITC Lubalin Graph Book
ITCBookmanDm
ITC Lubalin Graph Book Oblique
ITCBookmanDm It ITC Lubalin Graph Demi
ITC Lubalin Graph Demi Oblique
HelveticaNr
Marigold
HelveticaNr Ob
Monaco
HelveticaNr Bd
ITC Mona Lisa Recut
HelveticaNr BdOb
New Century Schoolbook Roman
New Century Schoolbook Italic
N C Schbk Roman
New Century Schoolbook Bold
N C Schbk It
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
N C Schbk Bd
NewYork
N C Schbk BdIt
Optima Roman
Optima Italic
ITC A G Go Bk
Optima Bold
ITC A G Go BkOb
Optima Bold Italic
ITC A G Go Dm
Oxford
ITC A G Go DmOb
Palatino Roman
Palatino Italic
ZapfC MdIt
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
ZapfDingbats
Stempel Garamond Roman
Stempel Garamond Italic
Stempel Garamond Bold
Stempel Garamond Bold Italic
Symbol
Tekton Regular
Times Roman
Times Italic
Times Bold
Times Bold Italic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light Oblique
Univers 55
Univers 55 Oblique
Univers 65 Bold
Univers 65 Bold Oblique
Univers 57 Condensed
Univers 57 Condensed Oblique
Univers 67 Condensed Bold
Univers 67 Condensed Bold Oblique
Univers 53 Extended
Univers 53 Extended Oblique
Univers 63 Extended Bold
Univers 63 Extended Bold Oblique
Wingdings
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
Symbol Sets
A symbol set is the collection of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special characters available in the
font you select. Symbol sets support the requirements for different languages or specific applications, such as math
symbols used for scientific text.
In PCL 5/PCL 6, a symbol set also defines which character will print for each key on the keyboard (or more specifically, for
each code point). Some applications require different characters at some code points. To support multiple applications and
languages, your printer has 36 symbol sets for the resident PCL 5/PCL 6 fonts.
Symbol Sets for PCL 5/PCL 6
Not all font names support all of the symbol sets listed.
Roman 8 (Default)
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-775 Baltic
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-1004 OS/2
PC Turkish
Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Windows 3.1 Latin 2
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
DeskTop
PS Text
MC Text
Microsoft Publishing
Math 8
PS Math
Pi Font
Legal
ISO 4 United Kingdom
ISO 6 ASCII
ISO 11 Swedish:names ISO 15 Italian
ISO 17 Spanish
ISO 21 German
ISO 60 Norwegian v1
ISO 69 French
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows Baltic
Symbol
Wingdings
ITC ZapfDingbats MS
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Understanding Printer Messages
The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer
problems you must resolve. This topic provides a list of all printer messages, explains what they mean, and tells you how
to clear the messages.
NOTICE: When an error code is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer and the information
accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secured.
1
Ready/Error indicator*1
5
Menu button
2
buttons
6
3
buttons
7
Information button* 2
4
Cancel button
8
LCD panel
(Set) button
* 1 Lights green when the printer is ready or sleeping and blinks when data is being received. Lights yellow when an
error occurs and blinks when an unrecoverable print error occurs.
mark is displayed at the beginning of a message, pressing the
* 2 When the
Information button will show more detailed information.
Message
(The first and second
lines are displayed
together. The third and
forth lines blink every
second.)
What this message means
What you can do
NNN-NNN
Restart Printer
Contact Support
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not
solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell."
If Message Returns
NNN-NNN
Restart Printer
Reseat XXX
XXX is not fully inserted.
Confirm that the unit is securely inserted.
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
If the problem is not solved, contact Dell.
Contact Support
XXX Error
See "Contacting Dell."
XXX is either missing or not fully inserted
in the printer.
NNN-NNN
Insert XXX.
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Confirm that the unit is securely inserted.
Life Over
NNN-NNN
Replace Now XXX
CRUM ID
NNN-NNN
Reseat XXX
CRUM DATA
NNN-NNN
Reseat XXX
XXX has reached its end of life.
Replace XXX.
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
XXX indicates a consumable.
See "Maintaining Your Printer."
An unsupported consumable is installed.
Replace the consumable with the supported one.
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
XXX indicates a consumable.
See "Maintaining Your Printer."
An unsupported consumable is installed.
Replace the consumable with the supported one.
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
XXX indicates a consumable.
See "Maintaining Your Printer."
A cover is open.
Cover Open
NNN-NNN
Close XXX
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Close the cover.
XXX indicates a cover.
The printer detects a paper jam.
Paper Jam
NNN-NNN
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
XXXXXX
CRUM ID
009-NNN
Reseat XXX
Reseat Fuser
See "Clearing Jams."
XXXXX indicates an instruction to clear a
paper jam.
An unsupported unit is installed.
XXX indicates a unit.
010-360
Restart Printer
Check and clear the paper path.
The outer levers on both sides of the
fuser unit are not securely locked.
Remove the unsupported unit and install a
supported one.
See "Maintaining Your Printer."
Confirm that the outer levers on both sides of
the fuser unit are securely locked. If this does
not solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell."
Contact Support
Ready to Print
Prepare a new fuser.
010-420
Fuser
The fuser needs to be replaced soon.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
See "Replacing the Fuser."
Ready to Print prepare
Check Cartridge
010-421
Replace Fuser
Check Cartridge
Replace the fuser.
The fuser needs to be replaced.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
See "Replacing the Fuser."
Contact Support
Env. Mode Error
010-910
Open Right Hand Cover
and make a Envelope
Lever the normal
position.
Open the right hand cover, and then lift up the
The printer is in the envelope mode when envelope lever to clear the envelope mode.
you print on plain paper.
See "Loading an Envelope in the MPF."
Close Right Hand Cover
016-XXX
Certificate Fail
Init Certificate
Inquire of your system administrator to reconfigure the security settings.
Certification error has occurred.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
See "Contacting Dell."
Are You Sure?
016-316
Restart Printer
Reseat Memory
The printer detected an unsupported
memory module in the memory slot.
Remove the unsupported memory module. If this
does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell."
Contact Support
016-318
Restart Printer
Reseat Memory
The memory module is not fully inserted
in the slot.
Remove the memory module from the slot, and
then reinsert it. If this does not solve the
problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell."
Contact Support
Turn the printer off and on. Ensure the following:
The wireless adapter is securely inserted in the
slot on the control board.
016-338
Restart Printer
Reseat Wireless
An error occurred in the wireless adapter. Unauthorized USB devices are not used.
Contact Support
If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell."
Invalid ID
016-383
An error occurred because an
Data Violation
invalid firmware is installed.
Press
(Set) button.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
See "Contacting Dell."
Press
Range Chk Error
016-384
Data Violation
(Set) button.
Press
In downloading the firmware, the address
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
of the writing destination is inaccurate.
See "Contacting Dell."
Press
Header Error
016-385
Data Violation
In downloading the firmware, the header
information of a download file is
inaccurate.
Press
(Set) button.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
See "Contacting Dell."
Press
Check Sum Error
016-386
Data Violation
In downloading the firmware, the
checksum of a download file is
inaccurate.
Press
(Set) button.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
See "Contacting Dell."
Press
Format Error
016-387
Data Violation
Press
In downloading the firmware, the format
of a download file is inaccurate.
(Set) button.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
See "Contacting Dell."
Press
Protection Error
016-391
Data Violation
Press
A firmware download was performed
while it was prohibited.
(Set) button.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
See "Contacting Dell."
Press
Erase Flash Err.
016-392
Contact Support
A ROM erasing error occurred while
downloading the firmware.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
A ROM writing error occurred while
downloading the firmware.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
A verification error occurred while
downloading the firmware.
Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly.
See "Contacting Dell."
If Message Returns
Write Flash Err.
016-393
Contact Support
See "Contacting Dell."
If Message Returns
Verify Error
016-394
Contact Support
See "Contacting Dell."
If Message Returns
016-522
Restart Printer
Certificate Fail
An SSL authentication error of the LDAP
server has occurred. The SSL client
certificate cannot be acquired.
Contact Administer
The SSL client certificate is required from the
LDAP server.
Ask your system administrator to set the SSL
client certificate on the printer.
016-523
Restart Printer
Certificate Fail
An SSL authentication error of the LDAP
server has occurred. The server
certificate data is invalid.
The printer cannot trust the SSL certificate of the
LDAP server. Ask your system administrator to
register the root certificate of the SSL certificate
of the LDAP server on the printer.
Contact Administer
Ask your system administrator to use a valid SSL
certificate of the LDAP server.
016-524
Restart Printer
Certificate Fail
Contact Administer
An SSL authentication error of the LDAP
server has occurred.
The server certificate is invalid or the
address of the LDAP server set on the
printer does not match the one described
in the SSL certificate.
016-527
Restart Printer
Certificate Fail
An SSL authentication error of the
Kerberos server or the LDAP server has
occurred.
Ensure that the address of the LDAP server set
on the printer and the address described in the
SSL certificate of the LDAP server match.
This error can be cleared by disabling LDAPSSL/TLS Communication under SSL/TLS in the
printer menu. Take note that the validity of the
connected LDAP server will not be guaranteed in
this case.
Ask your system administrator to confirm
whether the Kerberos server or the LDAP server
is set correctly on the printer.
If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
Contact Administer
Press
Job Fail
016-531
Sign On Error
An authentication error of the LDAP
server or of the Kerberos server has
occurred.
See "Contacting Dell."
Press
Job Fail
Wrong Attribute
Ask your system administrator to confirm
whether the Kerberos server and the LDAP server
are set correctly on the printer.
If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
Press
016-532
The user information of the LDAP server
is invalid.
Ask your system administrator to confirm
whether the user information is set correctly on
the LDAP server.
Press
016-533
Clock Skew Err.
Press
(Set) button.
Also confirm whether LDAP is set correctly on the
printer.
Press
Job Fail
(Set) button.
An authentication protocol error of the
Kerberos server has occurred.
(Set) button.
Confirm whether the clock of the printer and the
clock of the Kerberos server are set correctly and
identically.
The time difference between the clocks of Also confirm whether the summer time and the
the printer and the Kerberos server
time zone are set identically on the printer and
exceeds the limit value of the clock skew the Kerberos server.
of the Kerberos server.
See "Clock Settings."
See "Date & Time."
Job Fail
016-534
Wrong Server
The Kerberos server setting information
or the LDAP server setting information is
invalid.
Press
Job Fail
016-535
Admin Error
The account setting values for the LDAP
administrator are invalid.
016-536
Access Error
Press
Certificate Fail
Restart Printer
Certificate Fail
Contact Administer
Ask your system administrator to confirm
whether the account values for the administrator
of the LDAP server are set correctly on the
printer.
Press
Setting a secondary server without
setting a primary server may result in
this error.
Ask your system administrator to confirm
whether the LDAP server or the Kerberos server
is set correctly on the printer.
A wireless certificate cannot be correctly
referenced while using the Wireless WPA
Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise.
Ask your system administrator to connect the
printer with a wired network, initialize the
Wireless settings, import the Wireless certificate,
and set WPA-Enterprise or WPA2 Enterprise
again.
Contact Administer
016-542
(Set) button.
An internal error of the LDAP server or of
the Kerberos server has occurred.
016-541
Restart Printer
(Set) button.
Ask your system administrator to confirm
whether the Kerberos server and the LDAP server
are set correctly on the printer.
Press
Press
Job Fail
Press
A server certificate error has occurred
when acquiring the certificate with the
operation of WPA-Enterprise or WPA2Enterprise.
(Set) button.
Ask your system administrator to confirm the
server certificate being used with the Radius
This is a problem in the server certificate, server.
such as the validity period has expired
for the server certificate being used with
the Radius server.
016-543
Restart Printer
Certificate Fail
A certificate destruction error has
occurred while using the Wireless WPA
Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise.
Contact Administer
Ask your system administrator to connect the
printer with a wired network, initialize the
Wireless settings, import the Wireless certificate,
and set WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise
again.
(Set) button, then the Cancel button to
Press
cancel the current print job.
Delete unnecessary stored jobs.
Out of Memory
016-700
Job too Large
See "Deleting Stored Jobs."
The printer memory is full and cannot
continue processing the current print job.
To avoid this error in the future, do the following:
Delete unnecessary fonts, macros, and other
data in printer memory.
Press
Install additional printer memory.
See "Installing a Memory Module."
PDL Request
016-720
Data Violation
An error relating to the PDL emulation
problems has occurred.
Press
(Set) button, then the Cancel button to
cancel the current print job.
Press
Job Fail
016-756
Prohibited Time
Printing was attempted during the
prohibited time zone.
Press
(Set) button.
Inquire of your system administrator for the
permitted time zone.
Press
Press
Invalid User
016-757
Account Denied
Press
(Set) button.
Confirm whether the user account or the group
The setting values of the user account or account is set correctly with the printer driver
of the group account are invalid. Whether when printing.
the user is a member user or the group
See "Print Server Settings."
is a member group could not be
confirmed.
If the account is set correctly with the printer
driver, ask your system administrator to confirm
the setting on the LDAP server (external mode)
or the Print Volume (internal mode).
Disabled Func
016-758
Denied Col Print
The use of the print function or the use
of color printing is not allowed for the
user.
Press
Press
(Set) button.
Ask your system administrator to change the
settings to allow the use of the print function or
the use of color printing.
Reached Limit
016-759
Over your limits
The total number of printed pages has
reached the number allowed to be
printed.
Press
Invalid Job
016-799
Data Violation
The configuration of the printer set on
the printer driver does not match the
configuration of your printer.
Press
(Set) button.
Ask your system administrator to change the
maximum number of pages allowed to be
printed.
(Set) button, then the Cancel button to
Press
cancel the current print job.
Ensure that the printer configuration on the
printer driver match the configuration of your
printer.
Press
Wireless Error
016-920
Timeout Error
WPS failed to connect.
A timeout occurred during connection
with the wireless LAN access point
(Registrar).
Press
(Set) button.
Execute the operation again according to the
operation procedure.
Press
Download Error
016-921
Timeout Error
WPS failed to connect.
A download error has occurred during
connection with the wireless LAN access
point (Registrar).
Press
(Set) button.
Execute the operation again according to the
operation procedure.
Press
Wireless Error
016-922
Session Overlap Error
Press
Multiple wireless LAN access points
(Registrar) are being operated with WPSPBC.
Press
(Set) button.
Set only wireless LAN access point (Registrar) to
be operated with WPS-PBC, and execute the
operation again according to the operation
procedure.
(Set) button, then the Cancel button to
Press
cancel the current print job.
Delete unnecessary stored jobs.
See "Deleting Stored Jobs."
Disk Full
016-980
Job too Large
RAM disk memory or hard disk is full and
cannot continue processing the current
print job.
To avoid this error in the future, do the following:
Reduce the number of print pages by splitting
the print data.
Press
Increase free memory space by deleting
unnecessary data in the RAM disk or hard disk.
See "Installing a Hard Disk."
Collate Full
016-981
Job too Large
The specified print job exceeded the
printer memory capacity.
Press
(Set) button, then the Cancel button.
Re-try printing with a job of less volume.
Press
Tray Detached
024-9XX
Push in Tray N
A paper tray is detached.
N indicates the number of the tray.
Confirm if the indicated tray is securely installed.
One of the following has occurred.
No Suitable Paper
024-9XX
Load Tray N
XXXXXXXX
YYYYYYYY
Tray N has run out of paper.
The size or type of paper in the Tray N
does not match the specified one.
N indicates the number of the tray.
Load the specified paper
in Tray N .
See "Loading Print Media in Standard and
Optional Trays."
XXXXXXXX indicates a paper size.
YYYYYYYY indicates a paper type.
The size of the paper loaded in a tray
does not match the size specified on the
printer.
Load paper of the specified size.
See "Loading Print Media in Standard and
Optional Trays."
Paper Size Mismatch
024-91X
Load Tray N
XXXXXXXX YYYYYYYY
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Change the paper size settings according to the
size of the paper you load.
N indicates the number of the tray.
See "Tray Settings" on "Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool."
XXXXXXXX indicates a paper size.
YYYYYYYY indicates a paper type.
See "Tray Settings" on "Understanding the
Printer Menus."
Load paper of the specified size.
See "Loading Print Media in Standard and
Optional Trays."
The size of the paper loaded in the MPF
does not match the size specified on the
printer.
Load Tray MPF
Error NNN-NNN relates to printer
problems.
Change the paper size settings according to the
size of the paper you load.
XXXXXXXX YYYYYYYY
XXXXXXXX indicates a paper size.
See "Tray Settings" on "Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool."
Paper Size Mismatch
024-914
YYYYYYYY indicates a paper type.
See "Tray Settings" on "Understanding the
Printer Menus."
Stacker Full
024-916
Remove Paper
Prints have reached the capacity of the
stacker tray of the output expander.
Remove the prints from the stacker tray.
Stapled prints have reached the capacity
of the stacker tray of the output
expander.
Remove the prints from the stacker tray.
Prints have reached the capacity of the
center output tray.
Remove the prints from the center output tray.
Stacker Tray
Over Count
024-917
Remove Paper
Stacker Tray
Output Tray Full
024-920
Remove Paper
Center Output Tray
One of the following has occurred.
No Suitable Paper
024-969
MPF has run out of paper.
Load MPF
The size or type of paper in the MPF does Load the specified paper
not match the specified one.
in the MPF.
XXXXXXXX
YYYYYYYY
XXXXXXXX indicates a paper size.
See "Loading Print Media."
YYYYYYYY indicates a paper type.
Staple Error
024-976
1.Open Output Expander
Front Door and remove
paper.
Paper jam has occurred in the output
expander.
Remove the jammed paper following the steps
displayed in the operator panel.
See "Clearing Jams."
2.Close Output Expander
Front Door.
Staple Fail
024-977
Replace Now Stapler
Replace the stapler cartridge.
The stapler cartridge of the output
Order a new consumable at the website
Cartridge.
expander needs to be replaced now.
(www.dell.com/supplies).
See "Replacing the Stapler Cartridge."
Continue without Staple?
Are you Sure?
Empty Staple
024-979
Replace Now Stapler
Cartridge.
Replace the stapler cartridge.
The stapler cartridge of the output
expander is empty.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
See "Replacing the Stapler Cartridge."
Continue without Staple?
Are You Sure?
Stacker Full
024-980
Remove Paper
The stacker tray of the output expander
is full of prints.
Remove the prints from the stacker tray.
Some error has occurred in the output
expander.
Remove the prints from the stacker tray.
Since it is abnormally hot inside the
printer, printing is paused.
Wait for a while with the printer on until the
error disappears.
Stacker Tray
Finisher Error
024-982
Remove Paper
Stacker Tray
Over Heat
042-700
Restart Printer
Contact Support
If Message Returns
050-152
1.Open Output Expander
Front Door.
2.Please turn a knob if
necessary, and remove
paper.
Paper jam has occurred in the output
expander.
Remove the jammed paper following the steps
displayed in the operator panel.
See "Clearing Jams."
3.Close Output Expander
Front Door.
050-153
1.Open Output Expander
Front Door and remove
paper.
Paper jam has occurred in the output
expander.
Remove the jammed paper following the steps
displayed in the operator panel.
See "Clearing Jams."
2.Close Output Expander
Front Door.
Cartridge Error
091-NNN
Tape Staying
XXX Drum Crtrdg
Some pieces of ribbon are remaining in
the drum cartridge.
Remove the remaining ribbon from the drum
cartridge.
XXX indicates a color of the drum
cartridge.
Ready to Print
091-400
Waste Toner Box
Replace the waste toner box soon.
The waste toner box needs to be
replaced soon.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
See "Replacing the Waste Toner Box."
Ready to Print
Is close to life
Ready to Print
091-4XX
A drum cartridge needs to be replaced
soon.
Replace the drum cartridge of the indicated color
soon.
N Drum Crtrdg
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
N indicates the color of the drum
cartridge.
See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
091-41X
A drum cartridge needs to be replaced
soon.
Prepare a new drum cartridge of the indicated
color.
N Drum Crtrdg
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
Is close to life
Ready to Print
prepare
N indicates the color of the drum
cartridge.
See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
Insert the X drum cartridge into the correct color
slot.
Cartridge Error
091-92N
Insert XXX Drum Crtrdg
The X drum cartridge is either missing or
not fully inserted into the printer.
X indicates the color of the toner
cartridge.
If the message remains, set the X drum cartridge
again and push it in firmly.
Make sure that the X drum cartridge has been
fully installed.
See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
092-651
CTD Sensor Dirty
Clean the CTD sensor.
The CTD sensor is dirty.
Clean CTD Sensor
See "Cleaning the Conductivity Temperature
Depth (CTD) Sensor."
Ready to Print
A toner cartridge needs to be
093-42X
replaced soon.
N Toner Crtrdg
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
N indicates the color of the toner
cartridge.
See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."
Is close to life
Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color
soon.
Ready to Print
094-419
Belt Unit
Prepare a new belt unit.
The belt unit needs to be replaced soon.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
See "Replacing the Belt Unit."
prepare
Ready to Print
094-422
Belt Unit
Replace the belt unit soon.
The belt unit needs to be replaced soon.
Order a new consumable at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
See "Replacing the Belt Unit."
Is close to life
Belt Error
094-910
The belt unit is either missing or not fully
installed in the printer.
Follow the instructions in the operator panel and
make sure that the belt unit has been fully
installed.
Insert Belt Unit
See "Replacing the Belt Unit."
Belt Unit
Remove the belt unit and install a new one.
094-911
Replace Belt
The belt unit needs to be replaced now.
See "Replacing the Belt Unit."
Contact Support
Trans. Error
094-913
The transfer roller is either missing or
not fully installed in the printer.
Follow the instructions in the operator panel and
make sure that the transfer roller has been fully
installed.
See "Replacing the Transfer Roller."
Insert Transfer Roller
Ready to Print
142-700
Order a new belt unit at the website
(www.dell.com/supplies).
Since it is abnormally hot or cold inside
the printer, the print speed decreases.
Slow Speed Printing
You can use the printer, however the print
quality is inferior.
If you wait for a short while, the temperature
within the printer becomes normal.
Ready to Print
193-700
Non-DELL Toner
Installed
Back to Contents Page
The printer is in the custom toner
cartridge mode.
Though some of the toner cartridges have
reached the end of their lives, you can continue
printing.
Back to Contents Page
Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)
Adding Roles of Print Services
Printer Setup
This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the new Windows Vista ®, Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows ® 7 protocol of Microsoft ®.
Adding Roles of Print Services
When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need to add the roles of print services to the
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 client.
For Windows Server 2008:
1. Click Start® Administrative Tools® Server Manager.
2. Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3. Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4. Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
5. Click Install.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1. Click Start® Administrative Tools® Server Manager.
2. Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3. Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and
then click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
6. Click Install.
Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer, or using
Microsoft's Windows Add Printer wizard.
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
1. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers (Start® Devices and Printers for Windows
Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
2. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4. In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form of http://IP address/ws/.
NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address manually to create a WSD
printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually, follow the instructions below.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD printer, you must be a member of Administrators group.
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next.
5. If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or
confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
6. Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
7. Print a test page to verify print installation.
a. Click Start® Control Panel® Hardware and Sound® Printers (Start® Devices and Printers for
Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
b. Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Properties (Printer properties for Windows Server
2008 R2 and Windows 7).
For PCL driver:
On the Options tab, set each setting item, and then click Apply.
For PS driver:
On the Device Settings tab, set each setting item, and then click Apply.
c. On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Printing With UX Filter (UNIX)
Overview
Installing the UX Filter
Uninstalling the UX Filter
Printing and Using the Utilities
Precautions and Limitations
Overview
The UX Filter
This section describes the features of the UX filter and its operating environment.
Features
The UX filter is an utility software which converts files created by the UNIX workstation into a format which conforms to
the PostScript language loaded in the printer. The utility provides software that converts text files, SunRaster image files
(for Sun/Solaris only), TIFF image files and XWD image files into the PostScript language program. Also, it makes use of
the printer features to output in the following manner.
Input paper selection
Double-sided printing
Output paper selection
NOTICE: Depending on the configurations of the printers, some may not be able to use the UX filter.
Operating Environment
Text files, SunRaster image files (for Solaris only), TIFF image files and XWD image files received from a workstation
connected to a printer by a USB cable or parallel cable (hereinafter referred to as the local workstation), or from one
located on the network (hereinafter referred to as the remote workstation), can be converted into the PostScript language
program and output to the printer.
In addition, it can also be used in an environment where a printer, installed with an interface board, is connected directly
to the network.
Before Using the UX Filter
Check the following items before using the UX filter.
Before setting up the workstation, set up the printer as follows.
1. Make sure the lpd port is working or not when using the network environment. If the lpd port is not working, set
LPD to On on the operator panel. (Mandatory) See "Protocol" for more information.
When a parallel or USB port is to be used, make sure these are working. (Mandatory)
2. Set up IP address and subnet mask when the printer is used in the network environment. (Mandatory)
3. Make TBCPFilter function available if TBCPFilter function is installed on the printer. See "Adobe Protocol" for more
information.
Installing the UX Filter
Before Installation
The following are required for the installation.
Supported operating system is described in "Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and
Interface."
Disk capacity: 20 MB of free disk space required, including temporary working space for installation.
Log on as a root account to perform the operation here. If you have no root privilege, contact your system
administrator.
Output printer must be registered in the workstation before using UX filter. (HP-UX)
Use sam command for registration of output printer.
For more information, see the HP-UX related manual.
Files Added by the Installation
The following files will be added when the UX filter is installed.
Solaris
Directory
File name
Contents
txt2ps2
Text conversion utility
sunras2ps2
SunRaster conversion utility
/usr/local/dellbin5130 tiff2ps2
xwd2ps2
TIFF conversion utility
XWD conversion utility
dellpsif
Input filter
dellposttxt5130cdn
Symbolic link file to call txt2ps2
/usr/lib/lp/postscript dellpostps5130cdn
Symbolic link file to call dellpsif
dellbinpath5130
Directory description file for the UX filter print tool
/usr/lib/lp/model
Model interface
program
Source file of the model interface program (stored as the printer
name during registration)
/etc/lp/interfaces
Model interface
program
Interface program for PRINTER (stored as the printer name during
registration)
posttxt5130cdn.fd
Filter description file for txt2ps2
dell5130cdn.fd
Dell5130cdn filter description file for Dell 5130cdn Color Laser Printer
postio5130.fd
Dellpostio filter description file
download5130cdn.fd
Delldownload filter description file
txt2ps25130cdn.1
Manual page file for txt2ps2
/etc/lp/fd
sunras2ps25130cdn.1 Manual page file for sunras2ps2
/usr/share/man/man1
tiff2ps25130cdn.1
Manual page file for tiff2ps2
xwd2ps25130cdn.1
Manual page file for xwd2ps2
dellpsif5130cdn.1
Manual page file for dellpsif
NOTE: The directories listed are default directories.
HP-UX
Directory
/usr/local/dellbin5130
/usr/lib/lp/postscript
File name
Contents
txt2ps2
Text conversion utility
xwd2ps2
XWD conversion utility
tiff2ps2
TIFF conversion utility
dellbinpath5130
Directory description file for the UX filter print tool
/usr/spool/lp/interface Model interface
program
/usr/share/man/man1
Interface program for PRINTER (stored as the printer name during
registration)
txt2ps25130cdn.1
Manual page file for txt2ps2
tiff2ps25130cdn.1
Manual page file for tiff2ps2
xwd2ps25130cdn.1
Manual page file for xwd2ps2
NOTE: The directories listed are default directories.
Installation Procedure Overview
This section provides information on the installation of the UX filter using the UNIX workstation.
Solaris
1. Setup the printer and network.
2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the local workstation.
3. Run the installer and begin the installation.
4. Print for testing the printer.
HP-UX
1. Setup the printer and network.
2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the local workstation.
3. Run the installer and begin the installation.
4. Print for testing the printer.
Operation on Solaris
Installation/Printer Setting
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD in the CD-ROM drive of the local workstation.
If CD-ROM drive is not mounted on your workstation, extract files by using another workstation that has a CD-ROM
drive to transfer those files to your workstation.
2. Log on as a root account and extract the installation script from the Drivers and Utilities CD.
NOTICE: If you have no root privilege, contact your system administrator.
# cd /tmp
# cp /cdrom/cdrom0/UXFILTER.tar /tmp
# tar xvf ./UXFILTER.tar
3. Type ./install.sh and run the installer.
# ./install.sh
4. Select the printer model to install.
Printer Model ?
1. Dell 5130cdn Color Laser Printer
2. Exit
Enter Process No (1/2)? : 1
5. The following menu appears. Select <1> and set up the local printer.
Solaris Installation for Dell 5130cdn Color Laser Printer Type Printer
1. Set Local Printer
2. Set Remote Printer
Enter Process No (1/2)? : 1
6. Type the device name of the connection port.
Enter port-device-name? [/dev/ecpp0] : /dev/bpp0
NOTICE: Specify the device file in the communication port available.
7. When Set Remote Printer is selected, type the host name of the server or the host name of the printer.
Enter server-hostname? : server
server-hostname is 'server' (y/n)[y] : y
NOTICE: The host name of the server must be pre-registered with DNS, NIS, NIS+ or /etc/hosts.
8. When Set Remote Printer is selected, type the remote printer name.
Enter server-printer-name? : ps
server-printer-name is 'ps' (y/n)[y] : y
NOTICE: Type ps when the printer is a network connection printer.
9. Type the printer name to be registered with the system.
Enter printer-name? [dell5130cdn] : dell5130cdn
Printer-name is 'dell5130cdn' (y/n)[y] : y
10. Specify the directory to install the utility. To install into /usr/local/dellbin5130, press the <Enter> key. To
change the directory, specify one.
Enter Binary directory name? [/usr/local/dellbin5130] :
11. If this utility has been installed earlier, the user will be prompted whether to overwrite the earlier version.
directory is '/usr/local/dellbin5130' (y/n)[n] : y
12. If the server input at step 5 the printer connected by the network, type <y>. If the server and the printer are
connected locally, type <n>.
'dell5130cdn'is network printer?:(y/n)[y] : y
The software installation is complete.
NOTICE: When the printing settings are modified or changed by the Administration Tool (admintool) after the
installation, printing may not work.
Operation on HP-UX
Installation Procedure
NOTE: The host name of the output printer which you want to specify in step 6 must be pre-registered with a sam
command.
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the CD-ROM drive of the local workstation.
2. Log on as a root account and extract the installation script from the Drivers and Utilities CD.
NOTICE: If you have no root privilege, contact your system administrator.
#
#
#
#
mount -F cdfs -o cdcase /dev/dsk/c1t2d0 /cdrom
cd /tmp
cp /cdrom/uxfilter.tar /tmp
tar xvf UXFILTER.tar
NOTE: /dev/ds/clt2d0 is an example. Specify the CD-ROM device file for all workstations.
3. Type ./install.sh and run the installer.
# ./install.sh
4. Select the printer model to install.
Printer Model ?
1. Dell 5130cdn Color Laser Printer
2. Exit
Enter Process No (1/2)? : 1
5. Specify the directory to install the utility.
Enter install directory name [/usr/local/dellbin5130] :
directory is '/usr/local/dellbin5130' (y/n)[n] : y
6. Type the name of the output printer. Type delllp5130cdn. Type the printer name to be registered with the system.
Enter output-printer-name? : delllp5130cdn
output-printer-name is 'delllp5130cdn' (y/n)[y] : y
NOTE: The registered printer name can be verified by executing lpstat -v.
7. Type the logical printer name. Register dell5130cdn. Type a printer name that has not already been registered
with the system.
Enter logical-printer-name? : dell5130cdn
Printer-name is 'dell5130cdn' (y/n)[y] : y
8. The utility will be installed in the directory specified at step 5. Registration will be executed here so that the logical
printer registered at step 7 can access the utility. As this process is automatically executed, no input is required.
With the above steps, the installation is complete.
Uninstalling the UX Filter
The UX filter does not come with an uninstaller. To uninstall the UX filter, follow the following procedure.
NOTICE: Log on as a root account to perform the operation here. If you have no root privilege, contact your
system administrator.
Solaris
1. Delete the printer that was registered with the system. Use the printer name created during the installation and the
lpadmin command.
# lpadmin -x printername
2. Delete the filters registered with the system. Delete the filters registered during the installation using the lpfilter
command.
#
#
#
#
lpfilter
lpfilter
lpfilter
lpfilter
-f
-f
-f
-f
dell5130cdn -x (for Dell 5130cdn Color Laser Printer)
download5130 -x
postio5130cdn -x
posttxt5130cdn -x
3. Delete the symbolic files required to call up the filter.
Delete the following files from /usr/lib/lp/postscript.
dellposttxt5130cdn
dellpostps5130cdn
dellbinpath5130
4. Delete the interface program files of Selected printer type name from /usr/lib/lp/model.
Please also delete the interface program files of Selected printer name from /etc/lp/interfaces.
5. Delete all the directories that contain the UX filters and the files in these directories created during the installation.
The following directories must be deleted.
/usr/local/dellbin5130
6. Delete the filter description files. Delete the following files from /etc/lp/fd.
Filter description files for various printers.
dell5130cdn.fd (for Dell 5130cdn Color Laser Printer)
download5130.fd
postio5130cdn.fd
posttxt5130cdn.fd
HP-UX
1. Delete the printer that was registered with the system. Use the sam command to delete the printer set up during
the installation.
# sam
2. Delete all the directories that contain the UX filters and the files in these directories created during the installation.
The following directories must be deleted.
/usr/local/dellbin5130 (directory specified during the installation)
Printing and Using the Utilities
Printing (Solaris)
This section provides information on printing that makes use of the filter. To print from Solaris, specify the printer
registered during the installation of filters as the output destination.
NOTICE: To use the lp command, make sure the operating environment of the spooler has been set up correctly
(enabled, available) using the lpstat command (lpstat-p all). For details on the options of the lp command
and the lpstat command or how to make use of them, see the related manuals of Solaris.
Printing From Solaris
To print to the default printer:
If the printer is registered as the default printer, the name of the printer can be shortened and specified as shown in
the following example.
% lp filename
To print to other printers:
To print to a printer named dell5130cdn, type as follows.
% lp -d dell5130cdn filename
NOTE: The name of the printer can be confirmed by executing lpstat -v.
To change the default printer temporarily for printing:
To change the default printer, set the printer name in the environment variable LPDEST.
To set a printer named dell5130cdn as the default printer for printing, type as follows.
% setenv LPDEST dell5130cdn
% lp filename
NOTE: Using this method, a default printer can be set up for each user.
NOTE: The above example describes the setup method executed when cache is used.
To select a paper tray for printing:
To select a paper tray for printing, specify the paper tray after the -y option of the lp command.
NOTE: Depending on installed options, the available paper trays are different.
To select and print to a letter size paper of the printer named dell5130cdn with landscape, specify as follows.
% lp -d dell5130cdn -y landscape -y letter filename
The following options can be specified by the lp command.
To print text files:
NOTE: It prints according to the length and width specified by the lpadmin command.
-y double
Sets printing to 2-column printing.
-y landscape
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-y size=n
Sets the font size to n point.
-y outcolumn=n
This option converts text to single-byte text and sets printing to start from the nth column.
-y outline=n
Sets printing to start from the nth line.
-y font=font
Sets the font for printing single-byte alphanumeric characters. If the font specified is not available for the
printer, the default fonts are used.
NOTE: To specify a font, type the font name as-is after the -y font= option.
% lp -y font=Courier-Oblique filename
NOTE: For information on the available fonts, see the PS Fonts List.
-y margin=u:b:r:l
Specifies the margin of a page in inches. The u (upper margin), b (bottom margin), r (right margin), and l
(left margin) are positive real numbers (up to two decimal points). The default is 0.
-y ps
The input file will be processed as the PostScript file. If the file does not begin with "%!", "%!" will be output
to the beginning line. Whether the file contains "%!" will be ignored.
To print text/PostScript files:
-y DuplexBook
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted
and both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound.
-y DuplexList
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted
and both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound.
-y tray-input
The paper tray-related parameters that can be specified by the lp command are as follows:
tray1
Feed paper from tray 1 (top tray).
tray2
Feed paper from tray 2 (the second tray from the top).
tray3
Feed paper from tray 3 (the third tray from the top).
tray4
Feed paper from tray 4 (the fourth tray from the top).
tray5
Feed paper from tray 5 (the fifth tray from the top).
a4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
a5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
b5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
letter
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
folio
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
legal
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
executive
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
monarch
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
com10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
dl
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
c5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2 to 215.9 mm
Length: 127.0 to 355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00 to 8.5 inches
Length: 5.00 to 14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified tray is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-y toner_save
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing.
-y nc=n
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer). If this option is not
specified, 1 will be selected.
-y cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-y ps
The input file will be processed as the PostScript file. If the file does not begin with %!, %! will be output to
the beginning line. If a file contains %!, this option will be ignored.
-y msi
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-y m=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
P
Stationery/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationeryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
R
Recycled Paper
RB
RecycledPaperBack/Recycled Paper - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2 - Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3 - Side 2
LH
LetterHead
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type for the printer can be used.
-y mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-y po=n
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
0
Use printer settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-y st=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following.
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 550-sheet tray)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
3
3rdTray/Tray 3(Optional 550-sheet feeder)
4
4thTray/Tray 4 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
5
5thTray/Tray 5 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
msi
Multipurpose Feeder
off
Off
-y sp
Specifies printed separators.
-y sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-y cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
-y pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High speed
hq
High quality
hr
High Resolution
-y cc=mode
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
Screen Display
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Business Graphics
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Standard
2
Auto
3
Gradation
-y gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed modes are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-y ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-y br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option values are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-y rgbc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
RelativeC
13
AbsoluteC
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y rgbpr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y rgbtp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low:yellowmiddle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta medium density,
Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high density, Black low density,
Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high density, and
"Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-y sl=mode
Specifies staple settings.
Available staple option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-y os=mode
Specifies offset settings.
Available offset option values are as follows:
0
Auto
1
Offset per Set (Offsets each copy before printing the next copy.)
2
Offset per Job (Offsets each copy per paper job you specify.)
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-y lh=mode
Specifies letterhead duplex mode settings.
When letterhead duplex mode is enabled, a print sheet is always fed through duplex feeding path in a
printer. As the result, a user can set sheets without caring about sheet orientation in an input slot.
Available Letterhead duplex mode values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
2
Auto
-y tr=mode
Specifies trapping settings.
Available trapping option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
-y -hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Specifies the print type.
Available types of setting are as follows:
For Secure Print
secure:UserID:Password:DocumentName
secure:UserID:Password:
For Private MailBox Print
private:UserID:Password:DocumentName
private:UserID: Password:
For Public MailBox Print
public:UserID::DocumentName
public:UserID::
For Proof Print
proof:UserID::DocumentName
proof:UserID::
For UserID, enter an ID up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " "(blank)
and 0x3A":" (colon).
For Password, enter a password up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric
characters).
For DocumentName, enter a document name up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except
0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":" (colon).
NOTE: When document name is not specified, the original document name will be used.
-y -Jown= jobownername: Password: jobgroupname
Specifies job owner name, password and job group name for authentication.
Available types of setting are as follows:
jobownername:password:jobgroupname
jobownername:password:
jobownername::
:password:
::
For jobownername, enter a job owner name up to 32 characters.
For password, enter an alphanumeric password between 4 and 12 characters.
For jobgroupname, specify a job group name up to 32 characters.
NOTE: Alphanumeric characters, including spaces and colons, and symbols can be entered to specify a job owner
name.
NOTE: When no job owner name is specified, login user name is used as job owner name.
NOTE: When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are ignored.
NOTE: When an unacceptable character is entered to specify a job owner name, "UnknownUser" becomes the job
owner name.
NOTE: When an unacceptable character is entered in a password, or when a specified password is not within the
range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is treated as not specified.
NOTE: Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if
authentication setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Printing (HP-UX)
This section provides information on printing from the registered logical printer during the installation.
Printing From HP-UX
To print to the default printer:
If the printer is registered as the default printer, the name of the printer can be shortened and specified as shown in
the following example.
% lp filename
To print to other printers:
To print to a printer named dell5130cdn, type as follows.
% lp -d dell5130cdn filename
To change the default printer temporarily for printing:
To change the default printer, set the printer name in the environment variable PRINTER.
To set a printer named dell5130cdn as the default printer for printing, type as follows.
% setenv PRINTER dell5130cdn
% lp filename
To print with added options:
To print with the options, specify the option of the lp command using -o as follows.
The available options are the same as txt2ps2/tiff2ps/xwd2ps2.
Depending on installed options, the available paper trays are different.
%lp -d dell5130cdn -o r -o ILT filename
To print using file format:
To print text files:
% lp -d dell5130cdn filename
To print XWD files:
% lp -d dell5130cdn -o XWD filename
To print TIFF format files:
% lp -d dell5130cdn -o TIF filename
To print PostScript files:
% lp -d dell5130cdn filename
To print PostScript files as text files:
% lp -d dell5130cdn -o TX filename
However, for PostScript files with options set up, such as paper selection, etc., when the same option is specified, it
will be ignored.
Authentication Printing
This section provides information on how to specify the group and user name used for authentication printing in the
environment variable.
Specifying the Group Name
To specify the Group Name for Authentication Printing:
You can specify a unique group name in the environment variable as follows.
% setenv JOWN5130G " jobgroupname"
NOTE: Up to 32 characters are acceptable for the group name. When a group name exceeds allowable character
length, the extra characters are ignored.
NOTE: If you specify the filter option when authentication printing is already specified, the filter option has the
higher priority over authentication printing.
Specifying the User Name
To specify the User Name for Authentication Printing:
You can specify a unique user name in the environment variable as follows.
% setenv JOWN5130U " jobownername"
You can specify the login name as the user name as follows.
% setenv JOWN5130U ""
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered to specify the user name. When a user name exceeds allowable
character length, the extra characters are ignored.
NOTE: If you specify the filter option when authentication printing is already specified, the filter option has the
higher priority over authentication printing.
Specifying the Password
To Specify the Password for Authentication Printing:
If you need to specify the password in authentication printing, you can specify the password in the environment
variable as follows.
% setenv JOWN5130P "password"
If you do not specify the password inexplicitly, type as follows.
% setenv JOWN5130P ""
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters. When an unacceptable character is entered in a
password, or when a specified password is not within the range of the allowable character length, the extra
characters are ignored.
NOTE: If you specify the filter option when authentication printing is already specified, the filter option has the
higher priority over authentication printing.
NOTE: If you only specify the password without specifying the user name in the environment variable, the login
name is assumed as the user name.
NOTICE: If you enter the password in the login file for automatically allocating the environment variable when you
log in, you are recommended to specify the appropriate access privilege that prevents unauthorized users from
reading the login file.
txt2ps2 (Solaris/HP-UX)
Format
/usr/local/dellbin5130/txt2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-2] [-r] [-F] [-llines] [-wcolumns]
[-ooutcolumns] [-Loutlines] [-en] [-ssize] [-E] [-ffont] [-Nc=copies] [-cl] [-ps] [mg=up:bottom:right:left] [-Hd=position:format:page] [-Hffont] [-MSI] [-M=type] [-Mfo=mode] [-Pon] [St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [-Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [-Gg=mode] [-Cb=cyanlow:cyan-middle:cyanhigh:magenta- low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low;yellow-middle:yellow
high:black-low:black-middle:black-high] [-Sl=mode] [-Os=mode] [-Lh=mode] [-Tr=mode] [Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown= jobownername:password:jobgroupname] [filename...]
Function
Reads text, converts it to the PostScript language program, and writes to standard output. If the filename is not specified,
the standard input will be taken as the command input.
By typing character strings in the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION, the input of option at the command line can be
omitted.
At the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION and the command line, if no option is specified, the printer will output in 10point font size in the portrait orientation.
At the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION and the command line, if the same option is specified, the one specified at
the command line will prevail.
txt2ps2 outputs the PostScript language program that adjusts the line/column according to the paper size. For this reason,
the user need not be aware of the paper size. If there is an option to specify the line/column, automatic line feed
according to the paper size will not be executed. Printing will be output according to the line/column specified.
txt2ps2 interprets the following control codes. Other control codes/undefined codes will be converted to octal numbers and
output as-is.
LF
Line feed
FF
Form feed (modifiable by option)
TAB
8-column tab stop (modifiable by option)
BS
Backspace 1 character
Option
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This option is available only
when the duplexer is installed on the printer.
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray. A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and selected
automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (top tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (the second tray from the top).
3
Feed paper from tray 3 (the third tray from the top).
4
Feed paper from tray 4 (the fourth tray from the top).
5
Feed paper from tray 5 (the fifth tray from the top).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2 to 215.9 mm
Length: 127.0 to 355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00 to 8.5 inches
Length: 5.00 to 14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing. In some
cases, this option will be ignored.
-2
Sets printing to 2-column printing.
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-F
Ignores the form feed code (FF).
-llines
Specifies the number of lines per page.
-wcolumns
Specifies the number of columns per line.
-ooutcolumns
Converts print data to single-byte text and sets printing to start from outcolumns.
-Loutlines
Prints text from the outline columns.
-en
Expands horizontal tabs to n columns (space). The default is 8.
-ssize
Specifies the font size as point size. The default is 10.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. For models without the image enhancement mechanism,
this option will be ignored.
-ffont
Sets the font.
NOTE: The available fonts are limited to the font in the printer. For more information, see "Understanding Fonts."
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-ps
The input file will be processed as the PostScript file. If the file does not begin with %!, %! will be output to the
beginning line. If a file contains %!, it will be processed in the same way as dellpsif.
-mg=up:bottom:right:left
Specifies the margin of a page in inches. The upper margin, bottom margin, right margin, and left margin are
positive real numbers (up to two decimal points). The default is 0.
-mg=0:0:0:3
Sets the left margin to 3 inches.
-mg=3:3:0:5
Sets the upper margin to 3 inches; bottom margin, 3 inches; and left margin, 5 inches. If the margin is 0, it
can be omitted.
-mg=:::3
Sets the left margin to 3 inches.
-Hd=position:format:page
Specifies the position that the user information of the header or footer is output at.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows.
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname
page specifies the page to output. This option is omissible.
f
Output the top page only.
(default in case of PostScriptfiles conversion)
a
Output all pages.
(default in case of Text files conversion)
Specify these options as follows.
In the case that convert text file, output the host name following the user name on the upper right corner of the
paper, output all pages.
(User name, Host name, all page output are default)
-Hd=ur
-Hd=ur:uh
-Hd=ur:uh:a
In the case that convert PostScript file, output the host name following the date and time on the lower left corner of
the paper, output all pages (a option value is necessary because output the top page only is default when
PostScript file is converted.)
-Hd=dl:th:a
NOTICE: If the paper size is not specified, it outputs the header and footer at the position of A4 size by default. If
the paper size is specified by lp command, the output position of the header or footer is not changed from the
position of the paper size specified by txt2ps2. Specify the paper size at the same time when the header and footer
option is used. Sometimes all pages are not printed despite specifying all page output when PostScript file
conversion is specified. In such cases, specify output the top page only. By using TZ environmental variable,
specify time zone (GMT etc.).
-Hffont
Specify the font to print the header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric fonts can be
specified. Helvetica is specified as default. If the wrong font is specified, the default European font of the printer can
be used. If the header/footer output option is specified, the font specification for the header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2- Side 2
P
Stationery/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationeryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
R
Recycled Paper
RB
RecycledPaperBack/ Recycled Paper - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
LH
Letterhead
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
0
Use printer settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators froms are as follows:
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 550-sheet feeder)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
3
3rdTray/Tray 3 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
4
4thTray/Tray 4 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
5
5thTray/Tray 5 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
msi
Multipurpose Feeder
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High Speed
hq
High Quality
hr
High Resolution
-Cc=mode
Specifies RGB Color Correction.
Available RGB Color Corrections are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
Screen Display
3
Standard/Normal
4
Business Graphics
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Standard
2
Auto
3
Gradation
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option values are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
RelativeC
13
AbsoluteC
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low:yellowmiddle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta medium density,
Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high density, Black low density,
Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high density, and
"Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Sl=mode
Specifies staple settings.
Available staple option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Os=mode
Specifies offset settings.
Available offset option values are as follows:
0
Auto
1
Offset per Set (Offsets each copy before printing the next copy.)
2
Offset per Job (Offsets each copy per paper job you specify.)
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Lh=mode
Specifies letterhead duplex mode settings.
When letterhead duplex mode is enabled, a print sheet is always fed through duplex feeding path in a printer. As
the result, a user can set sheets without caring about sheet orientation in an input slot.
Available Letterhead duplex mode values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
2
Auto
-Tr=mode
Specifies trapping settings.
Available trapping option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
secure
Secure Print
private
Private MailBox Print
public
Public MailBox Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":" (colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":" (colon).
Secure Print
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:
Private MailBox Print
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:
Public MailBox Print
-Hld=public:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=public:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Make sure you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a printer. Secure Print may not
be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through another server or data need to be handled by
another program such as PostScript files. Collate is automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown= jobownername: Password: jobgroupname Authentication Setting
Specifies job owner name, password and job group name for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login user name
is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is used as job
owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are ignored.
When an unacceptable character is entered to specify a job owner name, "UnknownUser" becomes the
job owner name.
NOTE: Characters acceptable for job owner name are alphanumeric characters and symbols, except for space and
colon.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters become the job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a job group name, the job owner name is treated as not
specified.
NOTE: Alphanumeric characters, including spaces and colons, and symbols can be entered to specify a job owner
name.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered to specify a group name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a password, or when a specified password is not within
the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is treated as not specified.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if authentication
setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Example
To convert the program list of the file.txt file into the PostScript language program that sets the paper to the landscape
orientation and prints in the 2-up mode, type as follows:
% txt2ps2 -r -2 file.txt | lp
To convert file.txt to the PostScript language program and output it to the file.ps file, type as follows:
% txt2ps2 file.txt > file.ps
% lp file.ps
To convert the output result of the command into the PostScript language program using txt2ps2 and print it to the
printer, type as follows:
% ls -alF | txt2ps2 | lp
Environmental Variable
TXT2PS2OPTION
Optional settings based on the environmental variable. To output in the 2-up mode, 8 points and the landscape
orientation, type as follows:
% setenv TXT2PS2OPTION "-2 -s8 -r"
To use the same options as those of the dellpsif filter specified by printcap, type as follows:
% setenv TXT2PS2OPTION "<dellpsif>"
File
/usr/local/dellbin5130/.dellpsdefault5130
This is the default command option setting file for individual users.
Important
When the same option is specified twice, the later setting will prevail. As TXT2PS2OPTION is analyzed before the
option of the command line, it is possible to temporarily modify the options already set in TXT2PS2OPTION by typing
at the command line.
The comment description (%%page:m n) of the page number cannot be output to the PostScript program file which
is output by the default option of txt2ps2. Thus, when the output of txt2ps2 is to be taken as the output of another
application (psrev of TRANSCRIPT, etc.), add the page number description by inserting the line command (Ilines).
If a BS code is found at the beginning of a line, the print position of the next character will be located at the left of
the beginning of the line.
When there are multiple tab codes in one line, the tab position may be off as a result of automatic line feed. In
such case, use the -I or -w option.
The number of columns specified by the -w option is not the actual number of printed characters. The actual
number of single-byte characters to be printed is derived by deducting the output column position (outcolumns)
specified by the o option from the number of columns specified by the -w option.
The -mg option cannot be specified when -w, -l, -o, and -L option are specified.
The start positions of margin of the margin command (-mg=u:b:r:l) are not set against the edge of the paper. The
margins are set against the printable area of the paper allowed by the printer.
Use the -ps option only when a PostScript file that contains no %! at the beginning of the file is used as the
PostScript file. If a normal text file is input, it will not function correctly.
In HP-UX, txt2ps2 considers files written by PostScript that contain %! at the beginning of the file as the PostScript
files. To print PostScript files as text files, specify the TX option. With this option, PostScript files will be processed
as text files.
sunras2ps2 (Solaris)
Format
/usr/local/dellbin5130/sunras2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-r] [-n] [-l=left,bottom] [s=width,height] [-S=width] [-E] [-Nc=copies] [-Cl] [-Hd=position: format] [-Hffont] [-MSI] [-M=type]
[-Mfo=mode] [-Pon] [-St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [-Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [Gg=mode] [-Ct] [-Br= mode] [-RGBc= mode] [-RGBPr= mode] [-RGBTp= mode] [-Cb=cyan-low:cyanmiddle:cyan-high:magentalow:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low;yellow-middle:yellow high:blacklow:black-middle:black-high] [-Sl=mode] [-Os=mode] [-Lh=mode] [-Tr=mode] [Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown= jobownername:password:jobgroupname] [filename...]
Function
Reads SunRaster data, converts it to the PostScript language program and writes to standard output. If the filename is
not specified, the standard input will be taken as the command input. SunRaster files with a pixel depth of 1, 8, 24, and
32 bits can be specified.
sunran2ps2 takes filename as having been created in 72dpi and calculates the output size. Thus, to convert SunRaster
files created in other resolutions, specify the size option (-s, -S) explicitly.
Option
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This option is available only
when the duplexer is installed on the printer.
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray.
A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and selected
automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (top tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (the second tray from the top).
3
Feed paper from tray 3 (the third tray from the top).
4
Feed paper from tray 4 (the fourth tray from the top).
5
Feed paper from tray 5 (the fifth tray from the top).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2 to 215.9 mm
Length: 127.0 to 355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxN inches defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00 to 8.5 inches
Length: 5.00 to 14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing. In some
cases, this option will be ignored.
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-n
Disables the addition of the showpage. It is used when files converted to the PostScript language program are
merged with files created with other applications.
-l=left,bottom
Specifies the print position. Printing will be executed from the left and bottom of the page. The default is 0.25
inches for both left and bottom.
-s=width,height
Specifies the output size. Printing will be executed with the width and height in inches.
-S=width
Sets the width of the output size in inches. The height will be calculated automatically according to the width.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-Hd=position:format
Specifies the position to be output the user information as the header or footer.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows.
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname.
Specify these options as follows.
In the case that convert text file, output the host name following the user name on the upper right corner of the
paper, output all pages.
(User name, Host name, all page output are default)
-Hd=ur
-Hd=ur:uh
-Hffont
Specify the font to print the header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric fonts can be
specified. Helvetica is specified as default.
If the wrong font is specified, default European font of the printer can be used.
If header/footer output option is specified, the font specification of header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
P
Stationery/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationeryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
R
Recycled Paper
RB
RecycledPaperBack/ Recycled Paper - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
LH
Letterhead
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
0
Use printer settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following.
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 550-sheet feeder)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
3
3rdTray/Tray 3 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
4
4thTray/Tray 4 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
5
5thTray/Tray 5 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
msi
Multipurpose Feeder
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High Speed
hq
High Quality
hr
High Resolution
-Cc=mode
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
Screen Display
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Business Graphics
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Standard
2
Auto
3
Gradation
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option value are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
RelativeC
13
AbsoluteC
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low:yellowmiddle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta medium density,
Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high density, Black low density,
Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high density, and
"Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Sl=mode
Specifies staple settings.
Available staple option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Os=mode
Specifies offset settings.
Available offset option values are as follows:
0
Auto
1
Offset per Set (Offsets each copy before printing the next copy.)
2
Offset per Job (Offsets each copy per paper job you specify.)
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Lh=mode
Specifies letterhead duplex mode settings.
When letterhead duplex mode is enabled, a print sheet is always fed through duplex feeding path in a printer. As
the result, a user can set sheets without caring about sheet orientation in an input slot.
Available Letterhead duplex mode values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
2
Auto
-Tr=mode
Specifies trapping settings.
Available trapping option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
secure
Secure Print
private
Private MailBox Print
public
Public MailBox Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":" (colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":" (colon).
Secure Print
-Hld=secure:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=secure:UserID:Password:
Private MailBox Print
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:
Public MailBox Print
-Hld=public:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=public:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Make sure you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a printer. Secure Print may not
be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through another server or data need to be handled by
another program such as PostScript files. Collate is automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown= jobownername: Password: jobgroupname Authentication Setting
Specifies job owner name, password and job group name for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login user name
is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is used as job
owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are ignored.
When an unacceptable character is entered to specify a job owner name, "UnknownUser" becomes the
job owner name.
NOTE: Alphanumeric characters, including spaces and colons, and symbols can be entered to specify a job owner
name.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters become the job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a job group name, the job owner name is treated as not
specified.
NOTE: Alphanumeric characters, including spaces and colons, and symbols can be entered to specify a job owner
name.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered to specify a group name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a password, or when a specified password is not within
the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is treated as not specified.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if
authentication setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Example
To output the displayed screen image to a file using the snapshot command and convert the file into the PostScript
language program using the sunras2ps2 command, type as follows.
% sunras2ps2 file.rs > file.ps
To output the displayed screen image to a file using the snapshot command, convert the file into the PostScript language
program using the sunras2ps2 command and output it to a printer, type as follows.
% sunras2ps2 file.rs | lp
Important
When -s and -S are specified at the same time or when the same option is specified twice, the later setting will
prevail.
If the output size option (-s, -S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the raster data as
one pixel of the printer.
If the print position option specifies a point beyond the printable area of the printer, data beyond the printable area
will not be printed.
tiff2ps2 (Solaris/HP-UX)
Format
/usr/local/dellbin5130/tiff2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-r] [-n] [-l=left,bottom] [s=width,height] [-S=width] [-E] [-Nc=copies] [-Cl] [-Hd=position:format] [-Hffont] [-MSI] [-M=type]
[-Mfo=mode] [-Pon] [-St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [-Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [Gg=mode] [-Ct] [-Br= mode] [-RGBc= mode] [-RGBPr= mode] [-RGBTp= mode] [-Cb=cyan-low:cyanmiddle:cyanhigh:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low;yellow-middle:yellow high:blacklow:black-middle:black-high] [-Sl=mode] [-Os=mode] [-Lh=mode] [-Tr=mode] [Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown= jobownername:password:jobgroupname] [filename...]
Function
Reads TIFF data, converts it to the PostScript language program and writes to standard output. If the filename is not
specified, the standard input will be taken as the command input. TIFF files with a pixel depth of 1, 4, 8, 24, and 32 bits
can be specified.
There are four types of supported compression formats.
Huffman compression (CCITT Group 3 transformed Huffman run length encoding)
Fax-CCITT3 compression (facsimile-compatible CCITT Group 3)
PackBits compression
Non-compression
Even in the above compression format, the TIFF file that has multiple images in one file is not supported.
tiff2ps2 takes filename as having been created in 72 dpi and calculates the output size. Thus, to convert TIFF files created
in other resolutions, specify the size option (-s, -S) explicitly for conversion.
Option
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This option is available only
when the duplexer is installed on the printer.
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray.
A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and selected
automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (top tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (the second tray from the top).
3
Feed paper from tray 3 (the third tray from the top).
4
Feed paper from tray 4 (the fourth tray from the top).
5
Feed paper from tray 5 (the fifth tray from the top).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2 to 215.9 mm
Length: 127.0 to 355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00 to 8.5 inches
Length: 5.00 to 14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing. In some
cases, this option will be ignored.
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-n
Disables the addition of the showpage. It is used when files converted to the PostScript language program are
merged with files created with other applications.
-l=left,bottom
Specifies the print position. Printing will be executed from the left and bottom of the page. The default is 0.25
inches for both left and bottom.
-s=width,height
Specifies the output size. Printing will be executed with the width and height in inches.
-S=width
Sets the width of the output size in inches. The height will be calculated automatically according to the width.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-Hd=position:format
Specifies the position to be output the user information as the header or footer.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows.
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname.
Specify these options as follows.
In the case that convert text file, output the host name following the user name on the upper right corner of the
paper, output all pages.
(User name, Host name, all page output are default)
-Hd=ur
-Hd=ur:uh
-Hffont
Specify the font to print header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric fonts can be
specified. Helvetica is specified as default.
If the wrong font is specified, default European font of the printer can be used.
If header/footer output option is specified, the font specification of header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
P
Stationery/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationeryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
R
Recycled Paper
RB
RecycledPaperBack/ Recycled Paper - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
LH
Letterhead
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are follows.
0
Use printer settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following.
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 550-sheet feeder)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
3
3rdTray/Tray 3 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
4
4thTray/Tray 4 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
5
5thTray/Tray 5 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
msi
Multipurpose Feeder
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High Speed
hq
High Quality
hr
High Resolution
-Cc=mode
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
Screen Display
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Business Graphics
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Standard
2
Auto
3
Gradation
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option values are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
RelativeC
13
AbsoluteC
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low:yellowmiddle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta medium density,
Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high density, Black low density,
Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high density, and
"Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Sl=mode
Specifies staple settings.
Available staple option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Os=mode
Specifies offset settings.
Available offset option values are as follows:
0
Auto
1
Offset per Set (Offsets each copy before printing the next copy.)
2
Offset per Job (Offsets each copy per paper job you specify.)
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Lh=mode
Specifies letterhead duplex mode settings.
When letterhead duplex mode is enabled, a print sheet is always fed through duplex feeding path in a printer. As
the result, a user can set sheets without caring about sheet orientation in an input slot.
Available Letterhead duplex mode values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
2
Auto
-Tr=mode
Specifies trapping settings.
Available trapping option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
secure
Secure Print
private
Private MailBox Print
public
Public MailBox Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":" (colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":" (colon).
Secure Print
-Hld=secure:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=secure:UserID:Password:
Private MailBox Print
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:
Public MailBox Print
-Hld=public:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=public:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Make sure you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a printer. Secure Print may not
be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through another server or data need to be handled by
another program such as PostScript files. Collate is automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown= jobownername: Password: jobgroupname Authentication Setting
Specifies job owner name, password and job group name for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login user name
is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is used as job
owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are ignored.
When an unacceptable character is entered for a job owner name, "UnknownUser" becomes the job
owner name.
NOTE: Alphanumeric characters, including spaces and colons, and symbols can be entered to specify a job owner
name.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered to specify a job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a job group name, the job owner name is treated as not
specified.
NOTE: Alphanumeric characters, including spaces and colons, and symbols can be entered to specify a job owner
name.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered to specify a group name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a password, or when a specified password is not within
the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is treated as not specified.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if authentication
setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Example
To convert the TIFF image into the PostScript language program and output it to a file, type as follows.
% tiff2ps2 file.tiff > file1.ps
To output the TIFF image to a printer, type as follows.
% tiff2ps2 file.tiff | lp
Important
When -s and -S are specified at the same time or when the same option is specified twice, the later setting will
prevail.
When the output size option (-s, -S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the TIFF data as
one pixel of the printer.
If the print position option (-lleft bottom) specifies a point beyond the printable area of the printer, data beyond
the printable area will not be printed.
xwd2ps2 (Solaris/HP-UX)
Format
/usr/local/dellbin5130/xwd2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-r] [-n] [-l=left,bottom] [s=width,height] [-S=width] [-E] [-Nc=copies] [-Cl] [-Hd=position:format] [-Hffont] [-MSI] [-M=type]
[-Mfo=mode] [-Pon] [-St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [-Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [Gg=mode] [-Ct] [-Br= mode] [-RGBc= mode] [-RGBPr= mode] [-RGBTp= mode] [-Cb=cyan-low:cyanmiddle:cyan-high:magentalow:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low;yellow-middle:yellow-high:blacklow:black-middle:black-high] [-Sl=mode] [-Os=mode] [-Lh=mode] [-Tr=mode][Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown= jobownername:password:jobgroupname] [filename...]
Function
Reads XWD data, converts it to the PostScript language program and writes to standard output. If the filename is not
specified, the standard input will be taken as the command input. XWD files with a pixel depth of 1, 4, 8, 24, and 32 bits
can be specified.
There are three types of supported compression formats.
The visual class is Static Gray and the pixel is 1 bit.
The visual class is Pseudo Color and the pixel is 4 bits or 8 bit. The image format is Zpixmap.
The visual class is True Color and the pixel is 24 bits or 32 bit. The image format is Zpixmap.
xwd2ps2 takes filename as having been created in 72dpi and calculates the output size. Thus, to convert XWD files
created in other resolutions, specify the size option (-s, -S) explicitly for conversion.
Option
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be adjusted and
both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound.
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray.
A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and selected
automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (top tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (the second tray from the top).
3
Feed paper from tray 3 (the third tray from the top).
4
Feed paper from tray 4 (the fourth tray from the top).
5
Feed paper from tray 5 (the fifth tray from the top).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxN mm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2 to 215.9 mm
Length: 127.0 to 355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00 to 8.5 inches
Length: 5.00 to 14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing. In some
cases, this option will be ignored.
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation
-n
Disables the addition of the showpage. It is used when files converted to the PostScript language program are
merged with files created with other applications.
-l=left,bottom
Specifies the print position. Printing will be executed from the left and bottom of the page. The default is 0.25
inches for both left and bottom.
-s=width,height
Specifies the output size. Printing will be executed with the width and height in inches.
-S=width
Sets the width of the output size in inches. The height will be calculated automatically according to the width.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-Hd=position:format
Specifies the position to be output the user information as the header or footer.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows.
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname.
-Hffont
Specify the font to print header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric fonts can be
specified. Helvetica is specified as default.
If the wrong font is specified, default European font of the printer can be used.
If header/footer output option is specified, the font specification of header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
P
Stationery/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationeryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
R
Recycled Paper
RB
RecycledPaperBack/ Recycled Paper - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
LH
Letterhead
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
0
Use printer settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following.
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 550-sheet feeder)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
3
3rdTray/Tray 3 (Optional 550-sheet feeder)
4
4thTray/Tray 4 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
5
5thTray/Tray 5 (Optional 1100-sheet feeder)
msi
Multipurpose Feeder
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High Speed
hq
High Quality
hr
High Resolution
-Cc=mode
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
Screen Display
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Business Graphics
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Standard
2
Auto
3
Gradation
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option values are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
RelativeC
13
AbsoluteC
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low:yellowmiddle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta medium density,
Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high density, Black low density,
Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high density, and
"Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Sl=mode
Specifies staple settings.
Available staple option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Os=mode
Specifies offset settings.
Available offset option values are as follows:
0
Auto
1
Offset per Set (Offsets each copy before printing the next copy.)
2
Offset per Job (Offsets each copy per paper job you specify.)
This option is available only when the optional output expander is installed.
-Lh=mode
Specifies letterhead duplex mode settings.
When letterhead duplex mode is enabled, a print sheet is always fed through duplex feeding path in a printer. As
the result, a user can set sheets without caring about sheet orientation in an input slot.
Available Letterhead duplex mode values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
2
Auto
-Tr=mode
Specifies trapping settings.
Available trapping option values are as follows:
0
Off
1
On
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
secure
Secure Print
private
Private MailBox Print
public
Public MailBox Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":" (colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":" (colon).
Secure Print
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:
Private MailBox Print
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=private:UserID:Password:
Public MailBox Print
-Hld=public:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=public:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Make sure you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a printer. Secure Print may not
be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through another server or data need to be handled by
another program such as PostScript files. Collate is automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown= jobownername: Password: jobgroupname Authentication Setting
Specifies job owner name, password, and job group name for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login user name
is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is used as job
owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are ignored.
When an unacceptable character is entered to specify a job owner name, "UnknownUser" becomes the
job owner name.
NOTE: Characters acceptable for job owner name are alphanumeric characters and symbols, except for space and
colon.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters become the job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a job group name, the job owner name is treated as not
specified.
NOTE: Alphanumeric characters, including spaces and colons, and symbols can be entered to specify a job owner
name.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered to specify a group name.
When an unacceptable character is entered in a password, or when a specified password is not within
the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is treated as not specified.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if authentication
setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Example
To convert the XWD image into the PostScript language program and output it to a file, type as follows.
% xwd2ps2 file.xwd > file.ps
To output the XWD image to a printer, type as follows.
% xwd2ps2 file.xwd | lp
Important
When -s and -S are specified at the same time or when the same option is specified twice, the later setting will
prevail.
When the output size option (-s, -S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the TIFF data as
one pixel of the printer.
If the print position option (-lleft bottom) specifies a point beyond the printable area of the printer, data beyond
the printable area will not be printed.
Precautions and Limitations
During Installation
Pay attention to the following points during the installation.
Solaris
Use lpadmin command to register the default printer.
# lpadmin -d PrinterName
To inhibit the banner sheets output, change the value of nobanner=no to nobanner=yes that includes in the file
corresponding to the printer name in /etc/lp/interfaces/.
The printer registered by UX filter must not be changed by admintool.
When Content types: postscript is displayed by typing lpstat -p printername -l, it's necessary to delete
the printer and reinstall.
To install UX filter into the default directory (/usr/local/dellbin5130), it's necessary to create /usr/local
directory in advance.
HP-UX
The printer to specify as an output printer must be registered in your system. To register an output printer, use sam
command and so on. See the HP-UX related manual for details.
To install UX filter into the default directory (/usr/local/dellbin5130), it's necessary to create /usr/local
directory in advance.
During Printing
Pay attention to the following points during printing.
Using lp/lpr Command (Solaris/HP-UX)
If an option is specified incorrectly, no error message will be output. If printing is not executed after the lp
command is executed, activate each utility individually and error messages will be output.
(Using Solaris, the error message is displayed on the screen.)
In text printing, the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION will be ignored.
In text printing, if a BS code is found at the beginning of a line, the print position of the next character will be on
the left of the beginning of the line.
In text printing, when there are multiple tab codes in one line, the positions of tab may be off due to automatic line
feed. If this happens, specify l or w option.
In text printing, the number of columns specified by the w option does not reflect the number of characters actually
printed. The actual number of single-byte characters to be printed is derived by deducting the output column
position (out columns) specified by the o option from the number of columns specified by the w option.
If the same option is specified, or if s, S are both specified, the one specified later will prevail.
In printing images, If the print position option (l) specifies an area beyond the printable area of the printer, data
beyond the printable area will not be printed. (Using Solaris, it's impossible to output images by lp command.)
Using txt2ps2 (Solaris/HP-UX)
When the same option is specified twice, the later setting will prevail. As TXT2PS2OPTION is analyzed before the
option of the command line, it is possible to temporarily modify the options already set in TXT2PS2OPTION by
inputting at the command line
The default output of txt2ps2 cannot output the comment description (%%page:m n) of the page number. This is
because the converted PostScript language program controls line feed and form feed. Thus, when the output of
txt2ps2 is to be taken as the output of another application (psrev of TRANSCRIPT, etc.), add the page number
description by inserting the line command (-Ilines).
If a BS code is found at the beginning of a line, the print position of the next character will be on the left of the
beginning of a line.
When there are multiple tab codes in one line, the positions of tab may be off due to automatic line feed. If this
happens, specify the -l or -w option.
The number of columns specified by the -w option does not reflect the number of characters actually printed. The
actual number of single-byte characters to be printed is derived by deducting the output column position (out
columns) specified by the o option from the number of columns specified by the w option.
The -mg option cannot be specified when -w, -l, -o, and -L option are specified.
The start positions of margins of the margin command (-mg=u:b:r:l) are not set against the edge of paper. The
margins are set against the printable area for paper allowed by the printer.
Use the -ps option only when a PostScript file that contains no %! at the beginning of the file is used as the
PostScript file. If a normal text file is input, it will not function correctly.
To use the same options as those of the dellpsif filter by TXT2PS2OPTION, set the user's home directory in the
environmental variable HOME. If the environmental variable HOME is not set up, the same options as those of the
dellpsif filter cannot be used. (Linux)
Using sunras2ps2/tiff2ps2/xwd2ps2 (sunras2ps2 apply to Solaris only)
If the same option is specified, or if s, S are both specified, the one specified later will prevail.
If the size option (s, S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the image data as one pixel of
the printer.
If the print position option (-l left bottom) specifies a point beyond the printable area of the printer, data beyond
the printable area will not be printed.
Using tiff2ps2 (Solaris/HP-UX)
There are four types of supported compression formats.
Huffman compression (CCITT Group 3 transformed Huffman run length encoding)
Fax-CCITT3 compression (facsimile-compatible CCITT Group 3)
PackBits compression
Non-compression
Even if the format is a supported format, the tiff that has multiple images in one file is not supported.
Using xwd2ps2 (Solaris/ HP-UX)
There are three
The visual class
The visual class
The visual class
types of supported compression formats.
is Static Gray and the pixel is 1 bit.
is Pseudo Color and the pixel is 4 bits or 8 bit. The image format is Zpixmap.
is True Color and the pixel is 24 bits. The image format is Zpixmap.
Printing PostScript Files (Solaris/ HP-UX)
If same options for the PostScript file that contains options, such as paper size, are specified using dellpsif (Linux)
or the lp command (Solaris/HP-UX), the specified option will be ignored.
Printing Image Files (Solaris)
To print image files from Solaris the user cannot specify the image file directly with the lp command for printing.
Make use of sunras2ps2, tiff2ps2, xwd2ps2 and convert the file to a PostScript file. Output it using the lp command
after the conversion.
% xwd2ps2 file.xwd | lp
Header/footer Option (-Hd=position:format:page, -Hfheaderfont)
(txt2ps2,sunras2ps2,tiff2ps2,xwd2ps2)
If the paper size is not specified when using options, it outputs the header/footer at the position of A4-size paper.
To specify the paper size at the same time to use header/footer option. (If the paper size for the PostScript file
converted by using the option is specified by the option of lp command for example, the position of the header and
footer cannot be changed.)
The margin is specified automatically when the option is used. When the option to specify the margin is used at the
same time, the value that is smaller than the value specified automatically as follows is ignored.
In case of text files
Upper margin: 0.23 inch
Lower margin: 0.06 inch
Right margin: 0.03 inch
Left margin: 0.09 inch
In case of images
Lower margin: 0.3 inch
When using the option, the number of lines and the number of columns specified are ignored. Also, it is impossible
to specify landscape and 2-column.
In case of the PostScript file, it happens that the printer doesn't output all pages despite that output all page is
specified. In such a case, specify print the only top page.
It's impossible to use lp command in Solaris.
TBCPFilter (Solaris/HP-UX)
Make sure the TBCPFilter is available so the printer can specify the availability of the TBCPFilter.
As for libtiff
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAGHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Printing With CUPS (Linux)
Operation on Turbolinux FUJI or RedHat Enterprise Linux ES 4.0/RedHat Enterprise Linux 5.0 Desktop
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
This section provides information for printing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System)
on Turbolinux FUJI, RedHat Enterprise Linux ES 4.0/RedHat Enterprise Linux 5.0 Desktop or SUSE Linux Enterprise
Desktop 10.
Operation on Turbolinux FUJI or RedHat Enterprise Linux ES
4.0/RedHat Enterprise Linux 5.0 Desktop
Setup Overview
Turbolinux FUJI or RedHat Enterprise Linux ES 4.0/RedHat Enterprise Linux 5.0 Desktop:
1. Install the printer driver.
2. Set up the print queue.
3. Specify the default queue.
4. Specify the printing options.
Installing the Printer Driver
1. Double-click Dell-5130cdn-Color-Laser-x.x-x.noarch.rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2. Type the administrator's password.
3. Click Continue in the Completed System Preparation window.
Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window is automatically closed.
Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1. Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2. Click Administration.
3. Type root as the user name, and type the ROOT password as the password.
4. Click Add Printer.
5. Type the printer's name in the Name box in the Add New Printer window, and then click Continue.
The Location and Description do not have to be specified.
6. Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from Device menu, and then click Continue.
7. Type the printer's IP address in Device URI.
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (printer's IP address)
8. Select Dell from the Make menu, and then click Continue.
9. Select Dell 5130cdn Color Laser... from the Model menu, and then click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been added successfully. appears.
The set up is complete.
When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the software program. Start the print job from the
software program, and then specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can only print from the default queue depending on the software program (for example Mozilla).
In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on
specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."
Setting the Default Queue
1. Select Main Menu® System Tools® Terminal.
2. Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator's password)
lpadmin -d (The queue name)
Specifying Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double-sided printing.
1. Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2. Click Manage Printers.
3. Click Configure Printer of the queue for which you want to specify the printing options.
4. Type root as the user name, and type the administrator's password.
5. Specify the required settings, and then click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.
The setting is complete. Execute printing from the software program.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1. Select Main Menu® System Tools® Terminal.
2. Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator's password)
rpm -e Dell-5130cdn-Color-Laser
The printer driver is uninstalled.
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Installing the Printer Driver
1. Double-click Dell-5130cdn-Color-Laser-x.x-x.noarch.rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2. Type the administrator's password and click Install.
Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window is automatically closed.
Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1. Select Computer® More Applications... and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2. Type the administrator's password.
YaST Control Center is activated.
3. Select Hardware on the YaST Control Center and select Printer.
4. Printer setup: Autodetected printers is activated.
For USB connections:
a. Select Dell 5130cdn Color Laser on USB (//Dell/5130cdn%20Color%20Laser or /dev/usblp*) as
Available are, and then click Configure....
b. Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and then click OK.
For parallel connections:
a. Click Add.
b. Select Directly Connected Printers as Printer Type, and then click Next.
c. Select Parallel printer as Printer Type, and then click Next.
d. Click Next.
e. Set the name of the printer queue in Queue name, and type the queue name for printing in Name for
printing.
The Description of Printer and Location of Printer do not have to be specified.
f. Select the Do Local Filtering check box, and then click Next.
g. Select DELL in Select manufacturer. Select 5130cdn Color Laser in Select Model, and then click Next.
h. Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and then click OK.
For network connections:
a. Click Add.
b. Select Network Printers as Printer Type, and then click Next.
c. Select the Print via LPD-Style Network Server as Printer Type, and then click Next.
d. Type the printer's IP address in Host name of the printer server. And type the name of the printer queue
in Name of the remote queue, and then click Next.
e. Type the printer name in Name for printing.
The Description of Printer and Location of Printer do not have to be specified.
f. Select the Do Local Filtering check box, and then click Next.
g. Select DELL as Select manufacturer. Select 5130cdn Color Laser as Select Model, and then click Next.
h. Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and then click OK.
5. Click Finish.
Printing From the Application Program
When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the application program. Start the print job from the
application program, and then specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can only print from the default queue depending on the application program (for example
Mozilla). In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on
specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."
Setting the Default Queue
1. To activate the Printer setup: Autodetected printers, do the following.
a. Select Computer® More Applications... and select YaST on the Application Browser.
b. Type the administrator's password.
YaST Control Center is activated.
c. Select Hardware on the YaST Control Center and select Printer.
2. Select the printer you want to set to default on the Printer Configuration, and select Set default in Other
button menu.
3. Click Finish.
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double-sided printing.
1. Open a web browser.
2. Type http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and then press the <Enter> key.
3. Type root as the user name, and type the administrator's password.
The CUPS window appears.
NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you
have not set it, go to "Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."
4. Click Manage Printers.
5. Specify the required settings, and then click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.
The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application program.
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.
1. Select Computer® More Applications... and select Konsole on the Application Browser.
2. Type the following command on the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator's password.)
lppasswd -g sys -a root
(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt.)
(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt.)
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1. Select Computer® More Applications... and select Konsole on the Application Browser.
2. Type the following command on the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator's password)
rpm -e Dell-5130cdn-Color-Laser
The printer driver is uninstalled.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Printer Specifications
OS Compatibility
Power Supply
Dimensions
Memory
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface
Environment
Cables
OS Compatibility
Your Dell™ 5130cdn Color Laser Printer is compatible with Windows ® (2000, XP, XP x64, Vista, Vista x64, 7, 7 x64, Server
2003, Server 2003 x64, Server 2008, Server 2008 x64, Server 2008 R2 x64); Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4.x/10.5.x);
Novell ® (3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 4.2, 5, 5.1, 6, 6.5 (SP1.1 or later)) but not supported 1 ; Linux (Turbolinux FUJI (English),
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 (English), RedHat Enterprise Linux ES 4.0/5.0 (English)) but not supported 2 ; Unix (HPUX 11.i (English), Solaris 9/10 (English)) but not supported.
1
Dell technical phone support only supports factory-installed operating systems (Microsoft) for the first 30 days for free.
See http://www1.us.dell.com/content/products/compare.aspx/laser?c=us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz for more
details. The customer will have to purchase technical support from the manufacturer of the operating system in order to
get technical assistance beyond 30 days.
2
If the customer has other operating systems and has purchased Gold Technical Support (for more information on Gold
Technical Support, see http://www1.us.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/services/en/gts?
c=us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz), the telephone support will be a "best effort" attempt to resolve the operating system
issue. If the manufacturer needs to be contacted, the customer must pay an additional fee for that support. The only time
that Dell pays for the third-party support is when Dell is responsible for the issue. In the case of getting the printer
installed and working, this is configuration and the customer would be responsible for paying.
Power Supply
Rated Voltage 220-240 VAC 110-127 VAC
Frequency
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Current
4A
8A
Dimensions
Height: 431 mm (17 in.) Width: 560 mm (22 in.) Depth: 505 mm (20 in.)
Weight (not including cartridge): 41.5 kg (91.5 lb)
Memory
Base memory
256 MB
Maximum memory
1280 MB (256 MB + 1024 MB)
DIMM Connector
144 pin DDR2 SO-DIMM
DIMM Size
1024 MB
DIMM Speed
EP2-2100
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating
System, and Interface
PDL/Emulations PostScript 3, PCL 6, PCL5e, XPS
Microsoft ® Windows 7/7 x64/Server 2008 R2 x64/Vista/Vista x64/Server 2008/Server 2008 x64/XP/XP
x64/Server 2003/Server 2003 x64/2000 (SP3 or later), Mac OS X (10.2.8, 10.3.9, 10.4.x, 10.5.x)
OSes
Interfaces
Standard local:
USB2.0, IEEE 1284
Standard network:
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet
Optional network:
IEEE802.11b/802.11g/802.11n (Wireless)
MIB Compatibility
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as adapters,
bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze
performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell 5130cdn Color Laser Printer complies with standard-industry MIB
specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and network management software
systems.
Environment
Operation
Temperature
10-32°C
Relative humidity
15-85% RH (no condensation)
(Temperature should be 28°C or below at 85% RH.)
Print Quality Guarantee
Temperature
15-28°C
Relative humidity 20-70% RH (no condensation)
Storage
Temperature range
0-35°C (32-95°F)
Storage humidity range 15-80% RH (no condensation)
Altitude
Operating Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)
Storage
70.9275 Kpa
Cables
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type Connection specifications and symbols
1 Ethernet
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T
2 Wireless
IEEE802.11b/802.11g/802.11n
3 USB
USB2.0
4 Parallel
IEEE1284
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Maintaining Your Printer
Determining the Status of Supplies
Conserving Supplies
Storing Print Media
Storing Consumables
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Replacing the Drum Cartridges
Replacing the Fuser
Replacing the Separator Rollers
Replacing the Belt Unit
Replacing the Transfer Roller
Replacing the Stapler Cartridge
Replacing the Waste Toner Box
Cleaning Inside the Printer
Cleaning the Conductivity Temperature Depth (CTD) Sensor
Adjusting Color Registration
Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality. If several people are
using the printer, you may want to designate a key operator to maintain your printer. Refer printing problems and
maintenance tasks to this key operator.
Determining the Status of Supplies
If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback on
remaining toner levels. Type the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use the E-Mail
Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies, type your name or the name of the key
operator in the e-mail list box.
On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:
Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display
information about one item at a time.)
Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge
Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper.
Supply
Setting
Toner Saving
Toner
Mode in the
cartridge Advanced tab of
the printer driver
Print
media
Multiple Up in the
Layout tab of the
printer driver
Function
This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less toner. When this
feature is used, the image quality will be lower than when it is not used.
The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet. Values for Multiple Up are
2 Up, 4 Up, 8 Up, 16 Up, or 32 Up. Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple Up
allows you to print up to 64 pages on one sheet of paper. (32 images on the front and
32 on the back)
Storing Print Media
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do.
To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
the edges do not buckle or curl.
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:
Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
Direct sunlight.
Dusty places.
A car for a long period of time.
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
An environment with salty air.
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
NOTICE: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in your Product
Information Guide provided with your product.
NOTICE: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded
outlet before performing maintenance.
Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more cartridges online at support.dell.com or by
phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell."
It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for
problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Removing the Toner Cartridges
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Pull out the toner cartridge you want to replace.
CAUTION: Always pull out the cartridge slowly so you do not spill any toner.
NOTICE: Do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Toner can dirty and stain your hands.
NOTE: Be careful not to spill toner when handling the toner cartridge.
Installing a Toner Cartridge
1. Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color.
2. Shake the toner cartridge 5 to 6 times to distribute the toner evenly.
NOTE: Do not touch the area shown in the illustration when you shake the cartridge.
NOTE: Be careful not to spill toner when handling the toner cartridge.
3. Align the arrow on the cartridge with the arrow on the printer, and slide in the cartridge until it stops.
4. Close the front cover.
Replacing the Drum Cartridges
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide provided with your product.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
NOTICE: To protect the drum cartridges against bright light, close the inner cover within five minutes. If the front
cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may deteriorate.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer. Insert the Drivers and
Utilities CD into your printer.
Click start® Run, and then type D:\MaintenanceGuide\MaintenanceGuide.exe (where D is the drive
letter of your CD), and then click OK.
Removing the Drum Cartridges
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Rotate the lock levers of the inner cover to open it.
4. Grasp the handles on the drum cartridge you want to replace and pull out the cartridge halfway.
5. Grasp one side of the drum cartridge with the other hand and pull out the cartridge from the printer.
NOTICE: Do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Toner can dirty and stain your hands.
NOTE: Be careful not to spill toner when handling the drum cartridge.
Installing a Drum Cartridge
1. Unpack a new drum cartridge.
NOTICE: To protect the drum from overexposure to bright light, do not remove the orange protective covering
until you have inserted the cartridge in the printer.
NOTE: Be careful not to spill toner when handling the drum cartridge.
2. Pull out the two ribbons.
3. Slide the cartridge into the correct slot.
4. Remove the orange protective covering of the installed drum cartridge and discard.
5. Close the inner cover.
6. Rotate the lock levers to secure the inner cover while pressing the cover with the other hand.
7. Remove the cleaning rod from the backside of the front cover.
8. Remove the cleaning pad by pressing the white tabs between your thumb and index finger.
9. Unpack a new cleaning pad.
10. Attach the new cleaning pad to the cleaning rod.
11. Insert the cleaning rod fully into one of the four holes until it clicks into the interior of the printer as illustrated
below, and then pull it out.
12. Repeat Step 11 also on the other three holes. One time insertion is enough for each hole.
13. Return the cleaning rod to its original location.
14. Close the front cover.
NOTE: Whenever you replace the drum cartridges, also clean inside the printer to maintain high image quality. See
"Cleaning Inside the Printer."
Replacing the Fuser
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide provided with your product.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer.
Click start® Run, and then type D:\MaintenanceGuide\MaintenanceGuide.exe (where D is the drive letter of
your CD), and then click OK.
Dell fuser is available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell."
It is recommended to use a Dell fuser for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by
using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Removing the Fuser
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not replace the fuser immediately after printing. The fuser becomes
extremely hot during use.
1. Turn off the printer and wait for 30 minutes before removing the fuser.
2. Raise the latch on the handle of the right hand cover to open the cover.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you replace the
fuser.
3. Grasp both handles of the installed fuser with your hands and pull it out.
Installing a Fuser
1. Unpack a new fuser.
2. Grasp both handles of the fuser with your hands and install the fuser in the printer.
3. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
Replacing the Separator Rollers
There are three separator rollers in the printer which need to be replaced periodically. One is in the tray and the others
are inside the printer. All the separator rollers are replaced in the same way as described in this section.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide provided with your product.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer.
Click start ® Run, and then type D:\MaintenanceGuide\MaintenanceGuide.exe (where D is the drive
letter of your CD), and then click OK.
Removing the Separator Roller in a Tray
NOTE: Remove all paper or media from the tray before pulling the tray out of the printer.
1. Remove the tray from the printer.
2. Turn the separator roller cover to the left to open it, and then hold the cover.
3. Turn the separator roller cartridge to the right.
4. Pull out the rear axle, then the front axle from the holes of the tray and remove the separator roller cartridge.
Installing a Separator Roller in a Tray
1. Turn the separator roller cover to the left to open it, and then hold the cover.
2. Slide the front axle, then the rear axle of the separator roller cartridge in the holes of the tray.
3. Turn the separator roller cartridge to the left to fix it in place.
4. Turn the separator roller cover to the right to close it.
5. Load paper in the tray and replace the tray in the printer.
Removing the Separator Rollers Inside the Printer
1. Remove the tray from the printer.
2. Turn the separator roller until the roller hook is visible.
NOTE: The roller is located approximately 165 mm (6.5 inches) inside the printer when measured from the
face of the paper tray opening.
3. Pull the separator roller hook out of the groove on the axle, and then slide the separator roller to the front.
4. Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to remove other separator rollers from inside the printer.
Installing Separator Rollers Inside the Printer
1. Align the hole of the new separator roller with the axle.
2. Slide the separator roller along the axle so the protrusions fit completely into the slots and the roller hook reseats
into the groove on the axle.
3. Replace the tray into the printer.
Replacing the Belt Unit
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide provided with your product.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer.
Click start® Run, and then type D:\MaintenanceGuide\MaintenanceGuide.exe (where D is the drive letter
of your CD), and then click OK.
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the belt unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil
from your hands on the film of the belt unit may reduce print quality.
NOTICE: To protect the drum cartridges from overexposure to bright light, close the inner cover within five
minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may degrade.
Dell belt units are available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell." It is recommended to use a Dell
belt unit for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or
components not supplied by Dell.
Removing the Belt Unit
CAUTION: Do not touch the inside of the printer. Some parts may be hot. Allow time for the printer to
cool before attempting to remove parts.
NOTE: Remove all paper from the center output tray, and close the MPF cover before opening the front cover.
1. Turn off the printer and wait 30 minutes before removing the belt unit.
2. Raise the latch of the right hand cover and open the cover.
NOTE: Belt unit can be replaced only when the right hand cover is open.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you open
the right hand cover.
3. Open the front cover.
4. Rotate the lock levers of the inner cover to open it.
5. Grasp the handle on the front of the belt unit.
6. Pull out the belt unit until the line on the unit becomes completely visible.
7. Grasp the handles on the top of the belt unit. Pull out the unit to remove it from the printer.
NOTICE: Do not hold the parts shown in the illustration.
8. Slide the blue tab back-and-forth five times to clean the conductivity temperature depth sensor.
CAUTION: Be careful not to touch the fuser. It can burn your fingers.
Installing a Belt Unit
1. Unpack a new belt unit and place the unit on a level surface.
2. Remove the protective parts shown in the illustration.
3. Grasp the handles on top of the belt unit.
NOTICE: Do not hold the sides of the belt unit. It may degrade print quality.
4. Align the arrows on the belt unit with the arrows on the printer.
5. Slide the unit into the printer and stop when the visible line reaches the printer.
6. Lower the handles.
7. Push the front of the belt unit to reinstall it in the printer until it stops.
8. Close the inner cover.
9. Rotate the lock levers to secure the inner cover while pressing the cover with the other hand.
10. Close the front cover.
11. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
Replacing the Transfer Roller
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide provided with your product.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer.
Click start® Run, and then type D:\MaintenanceGuide\MaintenanceGuide.exe (where D is the drive letter
of your CD), and then click OK.
Removing the Transfer Roller
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Raise the latch of the right hand cover and open the cover.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you open
the right hand cover.
3. Unlock the two levers on the transfer roller and lift up the roller to remove it.
Installing a Transfer Roller
1. Grasp the levers on both sides of the new transfer roller and align the arrows on the transfer roller with the arrows
inside the printer.
2. Lower the front of the transfer roller until the roller clicks into place.
3. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
Replacing the Stapler Cartridge
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide provided with your product.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer.
Click start® Run, and then type D:\MaintenanceGuide\MaintenanceGuide.exe (where D is the drive letter
of your CD), and then click OK.
Removing the Stapler Cartridge
1. Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the front door of the output expander.
2. Press the orange lever of the staple cartridge holder and pull out the cartridge.
3. Squeeze the sides of the empty staple case and remove it from the cartridge.
Installing a Stapler Cartridge
1. Slide the tip of the new staple case into the cartridge and press the end into place.
2. Holding the orange lever, push the staple cartridge back into the holder until it clicks into place.
3. Close the front door of the output expander.
Replacing the Waste Toner Box
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide provided with your product.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer.
Click start® Run, and then type D:\MaintenanceGuide\MaintenanceGuide.exe (where D is the drive letter
of your CD), and then click OK.
Removing a Waste Toner Box
1. Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the front cover.
2. Hook your finger over the top of the waste toner box and pull it out towards you.
3. Grasp the waste toner box with your other hand as shown in the illustration, and pull it out of the printer.
NOTICE: Take care to avoid dropping the waste toner box while you are removing it.
NOTICE: After removing the waste toner box, do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Toner can dirty or
stain your hands.
NOTE: Be careful not to spill toner when handling the waste toner box.
4. Insert the used waste toner box into the plastic bag that came with the new waste toner box and seal the bag.
Installing a Waste Toner Box
1. Insert the new waste toner box into the slot and press it in until it stops.
2. Close the front cover.
Cleaning Inside the Printer
To prevent deterioration of printing quality due to stains inside the printer, clean inside the printer regularly by using the
cleaning rod whenever you replace drum cartridges.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
1. Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the front cover.
2. Remove the cleaning rod from the backside of the front cover.
3. Insert the cleaning rod fully into one of the four holes until it clicks into the interior of the printer as illustrated
below, and then pull it out.
4. Repeat Step 3 also on the other three holes.
5. Return the cleaning rod to its original location.
6. Close the front cover.
Cleaning the Conductivity Temperature Depth (CTD) Sensor
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the belt unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil
from your hands on the film of the belt unit may reduce print quality.
NOTICE: To protect the drum cartridges from overexposure to bright light, close the inner cover within five
minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may degrade.
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Raise the latch of the right hand cover and open the cover.
NOTE: Belt unit can be replaced only when the right hand cover is open.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you open
the right hand cover.
3. Open the front cover.
4. Rotate the lock levers of the inner cover to open it.
5. Grasp the handle on the front of the belt unit.
6. Pull out the belt unit until the line on the unit becomes completely visible.
7. Grasp the handles on the top of the belt unit. Pull out the unit to remove it from the printer.
NOTICE: Do not hold the parts shown in the illustration.
8. Slide the blue tab back and forth five times.
9. Grasp the handles on top of the belt unit.
10. Align the arrows on the belt unit with the arrows on the printer.
11. Slide the unit into the printer and stop when the visible line reaches the printer.
12. Lower the handles.
13. Push the front of the belt unit to reinstall it in the printer and until it stops.
14. Close the inner cover.
15. Rotate the lock levers to secure the inner cover while pressing the cover with the other hand.
16. Close the front cover.
17. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
Adjusting Color Registration
To adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a new location, follow the procedure
below.
Printing the Color Registration Chart
When Using the Operator Panel
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
4. Press
button until Color Reg Adj is highlighted, and then press
5. Press
button until Color Regi Chart is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
The color registration chart is printed.
When Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Enter the IP address of your printer into the web browser.
If you do not know how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool."
The Dell Printer Configuration Tool opens.
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Color Registration Adjustment.
The Color Registration Adjustment page is displayed.
5. Click the Start button on Color Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed.
6. Adjust all straight lines to a value of 0. Preview image of before and after adjustment will help.
CAUTION: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until the printer motor
has stopped running.
NOTE: If the straightest line does not line up perfectly with 0, then determine a value and adjust the color again.
Determining Values
From the lines to the right of the Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan) pattern, find the values of the straightest lines.
NOTE: You can also use the densest colors of the lattice pattern to find the straightest lines. The colors printed at
the highest density are those next to the straightest lines. When 0 is the value nearest the straightest line, you do
not need to adjust the color registration. When the value is not 0, follow the procedure outlined in "Entering
Values".
Entering Values
When Using the Operator Panel
Using the operator panel, enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.
1. Press Menu button.
2. Press
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
3. Press
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
4. Press
button until Color Reg Adj is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
5. Press
button until Enter Number is highlighted, and then press
(Set) button.
The first digit of the Enter Number (for LY, LM, and LC) is highlighted.
6. Press
or
button until you reach the value (for example, +3) displayed on the chart.
7. Press
button once until the next value is highlighted.
(Set) button.
When all values are entered, press
The first digit of the Enter Number (for RY, RM, and RC) is highlighted.
8. Repeat Step 6 and then press
button once until the next value is highlighted.
When all values are entered, press
(Set) button.
9. Press
button until Color Regi Chart is highlighted, and then press
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.
(Set) button.
10. Color registration adjustment is complete when the straightest Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan) lines are
next to the 0 line.
When Using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
1. Enter the IP address of your printer into the web browser.
If you do not know how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool."
The Dell Printer Configuration Tool opens.
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Color Registration Adjustment.
The Color Registration Adjustment page is displayed.
5. Select the value with the straight line respectively, and then click the Apply New Settings button.
6. Click the Start button on Color Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed.
7. Adjust all straight lines to a value of 0. Preview image of before and after adjustment will help.
CAUTION: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until the printer motor
has stopped running.
NOTE: If the straightest line does not line up perfectly with 0, then determine a value and adjust the color again.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Removing Options
Removing the 550-Sheet Feeder
Removing the 1100-Sheet Feeder
Removing an Output Expander
Removing a Memory
Removing a Hard Disk
Removing the Wireless Adapter
If the printer location needs to change or the printer and print media handling options need to be shipped to a new
location, all print media handling options must be removed from the printer. For shipping, pack the printer and print
media handling options securely to avoid damage.
Removing the 550-Sheet Feeder
CAUTION: If you are removing the 550-sheet feeder, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power
cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before completing these tasks.
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2. Pull the tray out of the printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front slightly, and remove it
from the printer.
3. Remove the plastic part and the two screws provided with the feeder by unscrewing them with a coin or similar
object.
4. Remove the two screws joining the printer and the sheet feeders by unscrewing them with a coin or similar object.
5. Gently lift the printer off the tray module, and place it on a level surface.
CAUTION: To lift the printer safely, lift it with three people.
6. Insert the tray into the printer, and push it until it stops.
7. Reconnect all cables including the power cable into the back of the printer and turn on the printer.
Removing the 1100-Sheet Feeder
CAUTION: If you are removing the 1100-sheet feeder, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power
cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before completing these tasks.
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2. Lock down the brakes of the two casters at the front of the optional 1100- sheet feeder.
CAUTION: Failure to lock the brakes can cause the printer to move unexpectedly, resulting in injury.
NOTE: For easier and safer locking, make the brakes of the two casters face forward by pushing the 1100-sheet
feeder backward.
3. Pull the tray out of the printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, Lift the front of the tray slightly, and
remove it from the printer.
4. Remove the plastic part and the longer screw provided with the feeder by unscrewing them with a coin or similar
object.
5. Remove the two screws joining the printer and the sheet feeders by unscrewing them with a coin or similar object.
6. Gently lift the printer off the tray module, and place it on a level surface.
CAUTION: To lift the printer safely, lift it with three people.
7. Insert the tray into the printer, and push it until it stops.
8. Reconnect all cables including the power cable into the back of the printer and turn on the printer.
Removing an Output Expander
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Remove tray 1.
3. Open the front cover.
4. Unplug the cables and the connector from the socket.
5. Remove connector cover 1.
6. Remove connector cover 2.
7. Unplug the cables and connector from the socket.
8. Unplug power cable as shown in the illustration.
9. Remove the stacker tray.
10. Gently lift up the output expander from the printer.
11. Unplug the cables.
12. Remove the two screws.
13. Remove the bracket.
14. Remove the H transport unit from the printer.
15. Insert the center output tray.
16. Attach the two parts to the printer.
17. Close the front cover.
18. Return the tray 1 to its original position.
Removing a Memory
1. Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2. Rotate the screw counterclockwise on the metal casing to open the cover.
3. Remove the control board cover.
4. Push the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time to raise the memory up.
5. Hold the memory and pull it out.
6. Replace the control board cover.
7. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Removing a Hard Disk
1. Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2. Rotate the screw counterclockwise on the metal casing to open the cover.
3. Remove the control board cover.
4. Remove the hard disk cables from the connectors of the control board.
5. Remove the left side connector to the control board.
6. Remove the hard disk from the printer by releasing the hard disk's hook.
7. Replace the control board cover.
8. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Removing the Wireless Adapter
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2. Rotate the screw counterclockwise on the metal casing to open the cover.
3. Remove the control board cover.
4. Remove the wireless adapter from the printer by releasing the adapter's hook from underside of the wireless
adapter socket.
5. Insert the cap into the wireless adapter socket.
6. Replace the control board cover.
7. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Clearing Jams
Avoiding Jams
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams From the MPF
Clearing Paper Jams From the Standard Tray
Clearing Paper Jams From the Fuser
Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer
Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional Feeder
Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Expander
Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams. See "Print Media Guidelines"
for more information.
NOTE: It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
Avoiding Jams
Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" for more information.
See "Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" to load printer
media properly.
Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure the stack print media height does not exceed the maximum height
indicated by the load line labels in the trays.
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding one sheet at a
time through the multipurpose feeder (MPF).
Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.
Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media. Also, the recommended print
side should be face down when using the MPF.
Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."
Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.
Push all trays in firmly after loading them.
Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.
Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
Wipe the feeder rollers in the trays or MPF with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water if jams caused by
misfeeding paper occur frequently.
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage
the printer.
1 Fuser
2 Duplexer
3 Front Cover
4 MPF
5 550-Sheet Feeder (optional)
6 Tray 1
Clearing Paper Jams From the MPF
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Remove any paper loaded on or jammed in the MPF.
2. Close the MPF.
3. Raise the latch on the handle of the right hand cover to open the cover.
4. Remove any remaining pieces of paper jammed in the MPF.
5. Use the handle to lift the duplexer.
6. Remove any remaining pieces of paper.
7. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Standard Tray
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Raise the latch on the handle of the right hand cover to open the cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
3. Use the handle to lift the duplexer.
4. Remove any remaining pieces of paper.
5. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
6. Remove tray 1 from the printer.
7. Remove any paper jammed, creased or both from tray 1.
8. Replace tray 1 in the printer.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Fuser
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in
your Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
NOTE: Video instructions are also available in the Maintenance Guide.
The Maintenance Guide is included in the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with your printer.
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fuser becomes
extremely hot during use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Raise the latch on the handle of the right hand cover to open the cover.
2. Hold and lower the tab to open the inner part.
CAUTION: Be careful not to touch the fuser. It can burn your fingers.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. Replace the inner part.
5. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Open the right hand cover.
2. Use the handle to lift the duplexer.
3. Remove any paper from the duplexer.
4. Close the right hand cover.
NOTE: When closing the right hand cover, apply your hand in the vicinity of the handle as shown in the illustration,
and then press the cover firmly toward the printer.
NOTE: Stand straight in front of the right hand cover and not in front of the front cover, whenever you close the
right hand cover.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional Feeder
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Open the right hand cover of the optional feeder where paper is jammed.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
3. Close the right hand cover of the optional feeder.
4. Remove the tray from the same feeder.
5. Remove any paper jammed, creased or both from the feeder.
6. Replace the feeder in the printer.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Expander
Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Output Expander
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Ensure that the printer is not in operation, and open the front door of the output expander.
2. Rotate the knob clockwise and remove the jammed paper from the paper exit of the output expander.
NOTICE: If the paper jam message remains, repeat the same procedure.
3. Close the front door of the output expander.
4. If the paper jam message remains, repeat Step 1 and Step 2.
5. Close the front door of the output expander.
Clearing Paper Jams From H Transport Unit
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media
path.
1. Grasp the top cover handle of the output expander and open the cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
3. Close the top cover of the output expander.
Clearing Staple Jams From the Output Expander
1. Ensure that the printer is not in operation, and open the front door of the output expander.
2. Grasp the orange lever on the stapler cartridge and pull out the cartridge.
3. Visually check inside the output expander for any remaining staples.
4. Lift the metal part of the stapler cartridge.
5. Remove any staples jammed in the stapler cartridge.
6. Close the metal part.
7. Grasp the orange lever on the stapler cartridge and push the cartridge in the printer until it clicks into place.
8. Close the front door of the output expander.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Troubleshooting
Basic Printer Problems
Display Problems
Printing Problems
Print Quality Problems
Jam/Alignment Problems
Noise
Digital Certificate Problem
Problems with Installed Optional Accessories
Other Problems
Contacting Service
Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the following:
The power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The printer's power is on.
The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
All options are properly installed.
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on
the printer. This often fixes the problem.
Display Problems
Problem
Action
After the printer is turned on, the display on the operator
panel is blank, keeps showing Please wait..., or the
back light is not lit.
Menu settings changed from the operator panel have no
effect.
Printing Problems
Problem
Action
Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn
on the printer.
Self Test Message appears on the operator panel.
When the test is completed, Ready to Print is
displayed.
Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the
printer utilities are overriding the settings made on the
operator panel.
Change the menu settings from the printer driver,
the printer utilities, or the software program instead
of the operator panel.
Ensure Ready to Print appears on the operator panel before you send a job to print. Press
Menu button to return to Ready to Print.
Ensure print media is loaded in the printer. Press Menu button to return to Ready to
Print.
Verify the printer is using the correct page description language (PDL).
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
Job did not print or
incorrect characters
printed.
Ensure you are using the correct Ethernet, USB, Parallel cable, or wireless adapter and that
it is securely connected to the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
Check the printer's interface from the Admin Menu.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a panel settings page to verify that the
current interface settings are correct. Refer to "Printing a Panel Settings Page" for details on
how to print a panel settings page.
Ensure the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer. See
"Identifying Print Media and Specifications" for more information."
Flex print media before loading it in any of the sources.
Ensure the print media is loaded correctly.
Ensure the width and length guides on the print media sources are adjusted correctly.
Ensure the trays are securely inserted.
Do not overfill the print media sources.
Do not force print media into the multipurpose feeder (MPF) when you load it; otherwise, it
may skew or buckle.
Print media misfeeds
or multiple feeds occur.
Remove any curled print media from sources.
Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are using. See
"Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" for more information.
Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print media.
Load a print media source only when it is empty.
Wipe the separator rollers in the trays or MPF with a cloth that is slightly dampened with
water.
Envelope misfeeds or
multiple feeds occur.
Reduce the number of envelopes in the stack.
Page breaks in
unexpected places.
Increase the setting for Time-Out in the Printer Settings menu in the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Job prints from the wrong
Check the Paper Types in the Tray Settings menu on the printer operator panel and in
source or on the wrong
the printer driver.
print media.
Print media does not
stack neatly in the output
bin.
Printer does not duplex
pages.
Paper is curled in the
trays.
Turn the print media stack over in the tray or MPF.
Ensure 2 Sided is selected in both the PCL (Printer Control Language) menu on the printer
operator panel and in the printer driver.
Ensure you have enough print memory installed.
Load the paper into the MPF.
Print Quality Problems
NOTE: For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see "Understanding the
Printer Menus" and "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
The output is too light.
Action
Yes
No
1 Check if the whole page is printed light.
Go to
action 2.
Go to
action
8.
The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of toner in each
toner cartridge.
2
1. Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.
2. Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 3.
Does this solve your problem?
If you are using non-Dell brand toner cartridges, enable the Non-Dell Toner option.
3
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering your printer's IP address
in your web browser. (If you do not know how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.")
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Non-Dell Toner.
5. Ensure that the On check box is not selected.
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 4.
Does this solve your problem?
Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer driver.
4
1. On the Advanced tab, ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected.
Does this solve your problem?
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type setting in the printer
driver. For example, change the plain paper to plain thick.
5
1. On the Paper/Output tab, change the Paper Type setting.
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 5.
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 6.
Does this solve your problem?
6
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper Sizes." If not, use the
print media recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?
7
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 7.
Ensure that eight yellow ribbons are correctly removed from the drum cartridges. See "Replacing The task Go to
the Drum Cartridges." If not, remove the ribbons.
is
action
complete.
9.
Does this solve your problem?
Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod. See "Cleaning Inside the Printer."
8
1. After the cleaning is completed, start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 9.
3. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
9
1. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
3. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
The task
Contact
is
Dell.
complete.
Does this solve your problem?
Toner smears or print comes off.
Action
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
3.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
4.
Check if the envelope lever of the printer is lifted when you
print on plain paper.
If so, change it to the plain paper mode.
For more information on how to change the mode, see
"Loading an Envelope in the MPF."
Then raise the fixing temperature by turning up the value of
1 the Adjust Fuser of the Dell Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: When you use the optional output expander, check if
the lever of the output expander is pulled down (normal
mode).
For more information on how to change the mode, see
"Loading Print Media."
Does this solve your problem?
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the
Paper Type setting in the printer driver. For example, change
the plain paper to plain thick.
2
1. On the Paper/Output tab, change the Paper Type
setting.
Does this solve your problem?
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See
"Supported Paper Sizes." If not, use the print media
3 recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
4
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum
Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box. For
how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge
Software."
you are using has been damaged. Replace
The Tool Box opens.
it with a new one.)
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button. The 4
Go to
action
5.
Colors Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the fuser if you have a spare.
5
1. Replace the fuser. See "Replacing the Fuser."
2. After you replace the fuser, start Tool Box. For how to
start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer
Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
The task is complete. (The fuser you are
using has been damaged. Replace it with a
new one.)
Contact
Dell.
Does this solve your problem?
Random spots/blurred images
Action
Yes
No
Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly.
Printer Hardware."
1 See "Prepare
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
3.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly.
a Drum Cartridge."
2 See "Installing
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
3
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
Printer Software."
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
The Tool Box opens.
new one.)
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
The entire output is blank.
Contact
Dell.
Action
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
3.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
4.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
5.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
6.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
7.
The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the
amount of toner in each toner cartridge.
1
1. Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.
2. Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Does this solve your problem?
If you are using non-Dell brand toner cartridges, enable the Non-Dell
Toner option.
2
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering
your printer's IP address in your web browser. (If you do not know
how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.")
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Non-Dell Toner.
5. Ensure that the On check box is not selected.
Does this solve your problem?
Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer driver.
3
1. On the Advanced tab, ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check
box is not selected.
Does this solve your problem?
4
The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to plain
thick.
1. On the Paper/Output tab, change the Paper Type setting.
Does this solve your problem?
5
Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Sizes." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure that eight yellow ribbons are correctly removed from the drum
cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges." If not, remove the
6 ribbons.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
7
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box. For how to
start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.
The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Streaks appear on the output.
The task is complete. (The drum
cartridge you are using has
Contact
been damaged. Replace it with
Dell.
a new one.)
Action
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
3.
The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the
amount of toner in each toner cartridge.
1
1. Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.
2. Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Does this solve your problem?
If you are using non-Dell brand toner cartridges, enable the Non-Dell
Toner option.
2
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering
your printer's IP address in your web browser. (If you do not know
how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.")
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Non-Dell Toner.
5. Ensure that the On check box is not selected.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
3
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box. For how to
start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.
The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.
The task is complete. (The drum
cartridge you are using has
Contact
been damaged. Replace it with
Dell.
a new one.)
Does this solve your problem?
Part or the entire output is black.
Action
Yes
No
Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly.
Printer Hardware."
1 See "Prepare
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure Output Color is set to Color (Auto) in the printer
driver.
2
1. On the Graphics tab, ensure that the Output Color The task is complete.
is set to Color (Auto).
Go to
action
3.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
3
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
Printer Software."
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
The Tool Box opens.
new one.)
Contact
Dell.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.
The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Pitched color dots
Action
Yes
No
Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch
Configuration Chart.
1
1. Start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
3. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Proceed to the action corresponding to the
location of the problem:
Drum cartridge - 2
Fuser - 3
Belt unit - 4
Contact
Dell.
4. Compare the pitch of the color spots on your output
with that on the Pitch Configuration Chart, and
locate the cause of the problem.
Is the cause of the problem located?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
2
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum
Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge
you are using has been damaged. Replace it
with a new one.)
Contact
Dell.
The task is complete. (The fuser you are
using has been damaged. Replace it with a
new one.)
Contact
Dell.
The task is complete. (The belt unit you are
using has been damaged. Replace it with a
Contact
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the fuser if you have a spare.
3
1. Replace the fuser. See "Replacing the Fuser."
2. After you replace the fuser, start Tool Box. For how to
start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer
Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the belt unit if you have a spare.
4
1. Replace the belt unit. See "Replacing the Belt Unit."
2. After you replace the belt unit, start Tool Box. For how
to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer
Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
new one.)
Dell.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Vertical blanks
Action
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Go to
action
8.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
3.
Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod.
1
1. After the cleaning is completed, start Tool Box. For
how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
3. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure the light path is not covered.
2
1. Remove the drum cartridge, and keep it in the dark
place. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
2. Check the light path, and then remove the
shielding.
3. Reinstall the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
4. Start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
5. Select Chart Print from the left list.
6. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
3
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
Printer Software."
new one.)
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Ghosting
Contact
Dell.
Action
Yes
No
Locate the cause of the problem using the Ghost
Configuration Chart.
1. Start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
3. Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.
1
Proceed to the action corresponding to the
type of ghosting.
Positive ghost - 2a
Contact
Dell.
Negative ghost - 2b
The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.
Is the type of ghosting identified?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool
Box. For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding
Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.
The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.
2a
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
are using has been damaged. Replace it with
a new one.)
Contact
Dell.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2a.
Yes
No
Go to action 2.
Contact
Dell.
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
new one.)
Contact
Dell.
Does this solve your problem?
If using non-recommended print media, use the print
2b media recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?
Light-Induced Fatigue
Action
Check if the print defect falls under the patterns of lightinduced fatigue.
1
1. Start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
3. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does the print defect fall under the patterns of lightinduced fatigue?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
2
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
Printer Software."
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Fog
Action
Yes
No
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
new one.)
Contact
Dell.
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
1
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the 4 Color Configuration Chart button.
The 4 Color Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)
Action
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of the
location.
1
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering
your printer's IP address in your web browser. (If you do not know
how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool".)
2. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool starts, select Printer
Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Click Adjust Altitude on the Printer Maintenance tab.
5. Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the
printer is installed.
Is the problem recovered?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
2
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box. For how to
start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
The task is complete. (The drum
cartridge you are using has
Contact
been damaged. Replace it with
a new one.)
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the 4 Color Configuration Chart button.
The 4 Color Configuration Chart is printed.
Dell.
Does this solve your problem?
Jagged characters
Action
Yes
No
The task is
complete.
Go to
action 2.
The task is
complete.
Go to
action 3.
The task is
complete.
Contact
Dell.
Set Print Mode to High Quality in the printer driver.
1
1. On the Graphics tab, select High Quality from Print Mode.
Does this solve your problem?
Enable Bitmap Text Smoothing in the printer driver.
2
1. On the Advanced tab, set Bitmap Text Smoothing under Items to On.
Does this solve your problem?
If using a downloaded font, ensure that the font is recommended for the printer,
3 operating system, and the application being used.
Does this solve your problem?
Banding
Action
Yes
No
Locate the cause of the problem using the MQ Chart.
1
1. Start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
3. Click the MQ Chart button.
The MQ Chart is printed.
Is the cause of the problem located?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
Proceed to the action corresponding to the
location of the problem:
Drum cartridge - 2
Fuser - 3
Belt unit- 4
-
2
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
Printer Software."
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
The Tool Box opens.
new one.)
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the MQ Chart button.
Contact
Dell.
The MQ Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the fuser if you have a spare.
3
1. Replace the fuser. See "Replacing the Fuser."
2. After you replace the fuser, start Tool Box. For how
to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer
Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the MQ Chart button.
The task is complete. (The fuser you are using
has been damaged. Replace it with a new
one.)
Contact
Dell.
The task is complete.
Contact
Dell.
Yes
No
Go to action 2.
Contact
Dell.
The MQ Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the belt unit if you have a spare.
4
1. Replace the belt unit. See "Replacing the Belt Unit."
2. After you replace the belt unit, start Tool Box. For
how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Auger mark
Action
Check if the print defect falls under the patterns of auger
marks.
1
1. Start Tool Box. For how to start Tool Box, see
"Understanding Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
2. Select Chart Print from the left list.
3. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does the print defect fall under the patterns of auger
marks?
The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced.
Confirm the amount of toner in each toner cartridge.
2
1. Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status
The task is complete.
Monitor.
2. Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Go to
action
3.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare.
3
1. Replace the drum cartridge. See "Replacing the
Drum Cartridges."
2. After you replace the drum cartridge, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your The task is complete. (The drum cartridge you
Printer Software."
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
The Tool Box opens.
new one.)
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Contact
Dell.
Does this solve your problem?
Wrinkled/stained paper
Action
1
Verify that the correct print media is being used.
See "Supported Paper Sizes." If not, use the print
media recommended for the printer, and test print
your document again.
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Proceed to the action
corresponding to the type of print
media.
Plain paper - 2
Envelope - 4
The task is complete.
Go to action 3.
The print media you are
using is not supported. Use
another one.
Contact Dell.
The task is complete.
Go to action 5.
Does this solve your problem?
Check if the envelope lever of the printer is lifted
up when you print on plain paper, and test print
your document again.
2
NOTE: When you use the optional output
expander, check if the lever of the output
expander is pulled down (normal mode).
For more information on how to change the mode,
see "Loading Print Media."
Does this solve your problem?
3
If using non-recommended print media, use the
print media recommended for the printer, and test
print your document again.
Does this solve your problem?
Check if the envelope lever of the printer is down
when you print on envelope, and test print your
document again.
4
NOTE: When you use the optional output
expander, check if the lever of the output
expander is pulled up (envelope mode).
For more information on how to change the mode,
see "Loading Print Media."
Does this solve your problem?
5
If using non-recommended envelope, change it to
recommended one and try again.
The envelope you are using
is not supported. Use the
Go to action 6.
Does this solve your problem?
6
7
recommended one.
The wrinkle had appeared
Check if the wrinkle appeared within the square
within the allowable range.
whose each edge is 30 mm inside the four sides of
You can use the envelope
the envelope.
you are using.
Change the envelope with another one and try
again.
The task is complete.
Go to action 7.
Contact Dell.
Does this solve your problem?
8
9
10
If the wrinkle appeared on the envelope flap,
confirm the type of the tray in which the envelope
is set first. Is it the MPF?
Press the envelope to expel any remaining air in it.
Is the problem reduced or recovered?
Use Tray 1 to feed the envelope.
Does this solve your problem?
Change the envelope with another one and then
11 try again.
(Tray 1)
Go to action 9.
Go to action 11.
The task is complete.
Go to action 10.
The task is complete.
Go to action 11.
The task is complete.
The occurrence of wrinkles on
envelope flaps does not indicate
printer failure. There is no
problem to use the printer.
Is the problem reduced or recovered?
Damage on the leading edge of paper
Action
Yes
(MPF)
When you use the MPF, reverse the paper and then try again.
1 When you use any of the Tray 1 to 5, change the paper and then try again. The task is complete.
Does this solve your problem?
2
3
Change the paper with another one and then try again.
Does this solve your problem?
Use any of the Tray 1 to 5 in place of the MPF.
Does this solve your problem?
No
Go to action 2.
(Tray 1 to 5)
Contact Dell.
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Jam/Alignment Problems
NOTE: Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web
Tool, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" and "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
The top margin is incorrect
Action
1
2
Yes
Ensure that the margin is installed correctly on the application being used.
Does this solve your problem?
In Customer mode, correct the S-S direction KtoP parameter.
No
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Does this solve your problem?
The side margin is incorrect
Action
1
2a
2b
Yes
Ensure that the margin is installed correctly on the application
The task is
being used.
complete.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure that the paper guides are installed correctly.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure that the paper guides are installed correctly.
Does this solve your problem?
In Customer mode, correct the F-S direction parameter of
3a the MPF.
Does this solve your problem?
In Customer mode, correct the F-S direction parameter of
3b the tray.
Does this solve your problem?
Color registration is out of alignment
No
The tray where the trouble
occurred is:
MPF: Go to action 2a.
Others: Go to action 2b.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3b.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
Action
1
Yes
No
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 2.
Adjust the settings of the paper type on the printer driver to those of the tray.
Does this solve your problem?
Execute auto color registration adjustment.
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering your printer's IP address
in your web browser. (If you do not know how to launch the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool".)
2. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool starts, select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
4. Select Color Registration Adjustments.
5. Select Auto Correct and then click start.
6. See the report output from the printer.
2
The task Go to
is
action
complete. 3a.
Does this solve your problem?
3a
The task
Contact
is
Dell.
complete.
Replace the drum cartridge if you have a spare. See "Prepare Printer Hardware."
Does this solve your problem?
Print the Color Regi Configuration Chart and manually correct the color registration.
1. On the Registration Adjustment page, click the Color Regi Chart button.
The Color Regi Configuration Chart is printed.
3b
2. Identify the offset values from the chart and enter them in Enter Number. See
"Cleaning Inside the Printer" for details.
3. Click the Apply New Settings button.
4. Click the Color Regi Chart button to print the Color Regi Configuration Chart again.
The task
Contact
is
Dell.
complete.
Does this solve your problem?
Images are skewed
Action
1
2
Adjust the paper guides properly.
Does this solve your problem?
Install the belt unit according to an appropriate procedure. See "Installing a Belt
Unit."
Does this solve your problem?
Yes
No
The task is
complete.
Go to action
2.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
Tray 1 Misfeed jam
Action
Yes
No
Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of
the print media being used:
1
2a
2b
2c
Ensure that the tray 1 is properly inserted.
Does this solve your problem?
Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3b.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3c.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 2g.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3b.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3d.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4b.
Does this solve your problem?
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3a.
Reduce the number of envelopes set.
The task is
Does this solve your problem?
Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
Does this solve your problem?
Load coated paper on the MPF one sheet at a
time.
Does this solve your problem?
Correct the position of the envelop flap. See
Print Media."
2d "Loading
Does this solve your problem?
2e
2f
2g
The task is
complete.
Thick - 2a
Thin - 2b
Coated - 2c
Envelope - 2d
Label paper - 2e
Transparency - 2f
Manual Dup - 2g
Others - 2h
Reduce label papers set to 49 mm or less.
Does this solve your problem?
Reduce transparencies set to 12 mm or less.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Does this solve your problem?
Is the print media damp?
2h If so, turn the media over and then try again.
Does this solve your problem?
3a
3b
Fan the print media.
Does this solve your problem?
Wipe the separator rollers in tray 1 with a
cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?
3c
Press the envelope to expel any remaining air
in it.
Does this solve your problem?
Smooth the envelope if there is any distortion
3d on it.
Does this solve your problem?
4a
4b
Use print media that is not damp.
Go to action 4c.
Does this solve your problem?
4c
Change the envelope with another one and
then try again.
Is the problem reduced or recovered?
complete.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 3b.
MPF Misfeed jam
Action
Yes
No
-
-
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3b.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3c.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
4a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3b.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3d.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
4b.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
4c.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3b.
Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of the print media being
used:
1
2a
2b
2c
2d
2e
Thick - 2a
Thin - 2b
Coated - 2c
Envelope - 2d
manual Dup - 2e
Others - 2f
Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.
Does this solve your problem?
Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
Does this solve your problem?
Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
Does this solve your problem?
Correct the position of the envelop flap. See "Loading Print Media."
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Does this solve your problem?
Is the print media damp?
2f
If so, turn the media over and then try again.
Does this solve your problem?
3a
3b
3c
3d
4a
4b
4c
Fan the print media.
Does this solve your problem?
Wipe the separator rollers in MPF with a cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?
Press the envelope to expel any remaining air in it.
Does this solve your problem?
Smooth the envelope if there is any distortion on it.
Does this solve your problem?
Use print media that is not damp.
Does this solve your problem?
Reduce the number of envelopes set.
Does this solve your problem?
Change the envelope with another one and then try again.
Is the problem reduced or recovered?
Option Tray Misfeed jam
Action
1
Ensure that the tray is properly inserted.
Does this solve your problem?
Yes
No
The task is
complete.
Go to action 2.
Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of
the print media being used:
2
3a
3b
3c
Ensure the right hand cover is closed.
Does this solve your problem?
Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.
Does this solve your problem?
Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
Does this solve your problem?
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Does this solve your problem?
3d Is the print media damp?
4a
Fan the print media.
Does this solve your problem?
Wipe the separator rollers in tray with a cloth
4b moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?
4c
5
Turn over the print media.
Does this solve your problem?
Use print media that is not damp.
Does this solve your problem?
Thick - 3a
Thin - 3b
Manual Dup - 3c
Others - 3d
The task is
complete.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4a.
Go to action
4c.
Go to action 5.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4b.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4a.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4a.
Regi jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)
Action
1
Ensure that the fuser is set properly.
Does this solve your problem?
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
The task is complete. (The fuser you are using
has been damaged. Replace it with a new
one.)
Go to
action
3.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
Replace the fuser if you have a spare.
2
1. Replace the fuser. See "Replacing the Fuser."
2. After you replace the fuser, start Tool Box. For how
to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer
Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
3
Ensure that the transfer roller is installed correctly.
Does this solve your problem?
4.
Replace the transfer roller if you have a spare.
4
1. Replace the transfer roller. See "Replacing the
Transfer Roller."
2. After you replace the transfer roller, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
The task is complete. (The transfer roller you
are using has been damaged. Replace it with a
new one.)
Go to
action
5.
The task is complete.
Go to
action
6.
The task is complete. (The belt unit you are
using has been damaged. Replace it with a
new one.)
Contact
Dell.
Does this solve your problem?
5
Ensure that the belt unit is installed correctly.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the belt unit if you have a spare.
6
1. Replace the belt unit. See "Replacing the Belt Unit."
2. After you replace the belt unit, start Tool Box. For
how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your
Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)
Action
1
Ensure the fuser is installed correctly.
Does this solve your problem?
Yes
No
The task is complete.
Go to
action
2.
The task is complete. (The fuser you are using
has been damaged. Replace it with a new
one.)
Go to
action
3.
Replace the fuser if you have a spare.
2
1. Replace the fuser. See "Replacing the Fuser."
2. After you replace the fuser, start Tool Box. For how
to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer
Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Tray 1/Option Tray Multi-feed jam
Action
Ensure that the tray where the multi-feed occurred is inserted
1 properly.
Does this solve your problem?
2
Load coated paper on the MPF one sheet at a time.
Does this solve your problem?
Yes
The task is
complete.
The task is
complete.
No
If using coated paper, go to
action 2.
If using other type of print
media, go to action 3.
Go to action 4.
3
4
Use print media that is not damp.
Does this solve your problem?
Fan the print media.
Does this solve your problem?
Wipe the separator rollers in the tray where the multi-feed occurred
5 with a cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the separator rollers in the tray where the multi-feed
6 occurred if you have a spare.
Does this solve your problem?
The task is
complete.
Go to action 4.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 5.
The task is
complete.
Go to action 6.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
MPF Multi-feed jam
Action
Yes
No
-
-
Ensure the media type you are using.
1 If using coated paper, go to action 2.
If using other type of print media, go to action 3.
2
3
4
5
Use print media that is not damp.
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
Does this solve your problem?
Fan the print media.
The task is complete. Go to action 4.
Does this solve your problem?
Wipe the separator rollers in the MPF with a cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the separator rollers in the MPF if you have a spare.
Does this solve your problem?
The task is complete. Go to action 5.
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Noise
Action
1
To specify the cause of the noise, perform the Auto
Registration Adjustment.
Yes
No
Go to action 2.
Go to
action
3.
The task is complete. (The belt unit you are
using has been damaged. Replace it with a new
one.)
Go to
action
4.
Does the noise persist?
Replace the belt unit if you have a spare.
2
1. Replace the belt unit. See "Replacing the Belt
Unit."
2. After you replace the belt unit, start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding
Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the fuser if you have a spare.
1. Replace the fuser. See "Replacing the Fuser."
3
2. After you replace the fuser, click start Tool Box.
For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding
Your Printer Software."
The Tool Box opens.
3. Select Chart Print from the left list.
4. Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
The task is complete. (The fuser you are using
has been damaged. Replace it with a new one.)
Go to
action
7
The task is complete. (The waste box you are
using has been damaged. Replace it with a new
one.)
Go to
action
5.
Does this solve your problem?
4
5
6
Replace the waste box.
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge (K).
Does this solve your problem?
Replace the drum cartridge (YMC).
Does this solve your problem?
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge (K)
Go to
you are using has been damaged. Replace it with action
a new one.)
6.
The task is complete. (The drum cartridge (YMC)
Contact
you are using has been damaged. Replace it with
Dell.
a new one.)
7
Replace the toner cartridge (K). See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridges."
The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (K)
Go to
you are using has been damaged. Replace it with action
a new one.)
8.
8
Replace the toner cartridge (Y). See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridges."
The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (Y)
Go to
you are using has been damaged. Replace it with action
a new one.)
9.
9
Replace the toner cartridge (M). See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridges."
The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (M)
Go to
you are using has been damaged. Replace it with action
a new one.)
10.
10
Replace the toner cartridge (C). See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridges."
The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (C)
Contact
you are using has been damaged. Replace it with
Dell.
a new one.)
Digital Certificate Problem
Symptom
The LDAPSSL/TLS
Communication
setting and the
Upload Signed
Certificate
button are not
displayed
The certificate
import button is
disabled.
The certificate
details button is
disabled.
Cause
Action
An encrypted HDD is not connected.
Confirm whether the HDD is connected
correctly, and confirm whether Data
Encryption is enabled from the operator
panel or EWS.
SSL communication is disabled.
Create a self-signed certificate and enable
SSL.
The time setting is incorrect.
Confirm validity period of the certificate as
well as the time setting of the device.
Confirm whether the password is correct.
The certificate
cannot be
imported.
The certificate file is incorrect.
Confirm whether the file type is
PKCS#7/#12 or x509CACert (extension:
p7b/p12/pfx/cer/crt).
Confirm whether the attribute information
(key Usage/ Extended key usage) of the
certificate to be imported is set correctly.
The browser is incorrect.
Use Internet Explorer.
016-404 is
displayed when
setting the
encryption of
the HDD to
OFF.
016-404 is
displayed when
formatting the
HDD.
Security is set
to OFF when
setting
encryption of
the HDD to
OFF.
Security is set
to OFF when
formatting the
HDD.
The HDD is formatted and the certificate data is deleted
when setting encryption of the HDD to OFF. Since a
certificate is required and the security function cannot be
enabled when restarting the device afterward, 016-404 is
displayed and the security setting must be initialized. The
cause is the same when formatting the HDD or removing
the HDD.
After initializing, import the certificate and
enable the security settings again. The
action is the same when formatting the
HDD.
The validity period is invalid.
The validity period of the certificate is
invalid. Confirm whether the time setting
of the machine is correct, and whether
the validity period of the certificate has
expired.
The certificate path is invalid.
The certificate chain (path validation) of
the imported certificate may not be
correctly validated. Confirm whether all of
the high-level certificates
(Trusted/Intermediate) have been
imported and are not deleted, and
whether the validity period has expired.
The type of the certificate is incorrect.
To import a certificate for use with the
device (own device), import the secret
key and a certificate of the PKCS#12
(p12/pfx) format as a pair.
A certificate is
deleted when
setting
encryption of
the HDD to
OFF.
A certificate is
deleted when
formatting the
HDD.
A certificate
cannot be set
with "Certificate
Details".
Although a
certificate was
imported, it is
not displayed
when selecting
with "Local
Device".
Server
validation is not
The certificate chain is incorrect when importing.
operating
correctly.
Digital
Signature
cannot be
selected with
the IPsec
setting.
The certificate cannot be associated.
Although importing a root certificate
(Trusted) to use for server authentication,
an Intermediate certificate may be
required when validating the path.
When executing a certificate file with the
certification authority, create the
certificate with a format including all
paths and then import that certificate.
Either the certificate has not been
imported or the certificate has not been
associated for use with Digital Signature
of IPsec. Refer to "Setting the Certificate
in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode" to set
a certificate of Ipsec.
Problems with Installed Optional Accessories
If an option does not operate correctly following installation or stops working:
Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. If this does not fix the problem, unplug the
printer, and check the connection between the option and the printer.
Print the printer settings page to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed,
reinstall it. See "Printing a Printer Settings Page."
Ensure that the printer driver is updated with the option you want to use.
Ensure the option is selected in the printer driver you are using.
The following table lists printer's option and corrective action for related problem. If the suggested corrective action does
not correct the problem, call customer service.
Problem
550-sheet
feeder
1100sheet
feeder
Action
Ensure the 550-sheet feeder is correctly connected to the printer. Reinstall the feeder. See
"Removing the 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Installing a 550-Sheet Feeder."
Ensure the print media is loaded correctly. See "Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays"
for more information.
Ensure the 1100-sheet feeder is correctly connected to the printer. Reinstall the feeder. See
"Removing the 1100-Sheet Feeder" and "Installing a 1100-Sheet Feeder."
Ensure the print media is loaded correctly. See "Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" for
more information.
Memory
Ensure the memory is securely connected to the memory connector.
Hard disk
Ensure the hard disk is securely inserted to the correct slot.
Wireless
adapter
Ensure the wireless adapter is securely inserted to the correct slot.
Output
expander
Ensure the output expander is securely inserted to the correct slot.
If a problem occurs with the output expander, check the following solutions:
Compile Exit SNR ON Jam
Action
1
Ensure that the print media is loaded in the tray properly.
Does this solve your problem?
Yes
No
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
Check if the print media is deformed.
2 If deformed, change the print media to one not deformed.
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
Does this solve your problem?
Check if the print media is curled.
3 Uncurl the print media and then set it again.
The task is complete. Go to action 4.
Does this solve your problem?
4
5
Remove the print media left in the H Transport Unit.
Does this solve your problem?
Wipe the separator rollers in tray 1 with a cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?
The task is complete. Go to action 5.
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Compile Exit SNR OFF Jam
Action
1
Yes
Remove the print media left in the H Transport Unit.
Does this solve your problem?
No
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Set Eject Jam
Action
If using non-recommended print media, use the print media recommended for
1 the printer.
Does this solve your problem?
Yes
No
The task is
complete.
Go to action
2.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
3.
The task is
complete.
Go to action
4.
The task is
complete.
Contact Dell.
Check if the print media on the tray obstruct the output slot.
2 Remove the print media on the tray.
Does this solve your problem?
Check if the print media is curled.
3 Uncurl the print media and then set it again.
Does this solve your problem?
4
Wipe the separator rollers in tray 1 with a cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?
Other Problems
Problem
Action
Condensation
has occurred
inside the
printer.
This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter. This also occurs when the
printer is operating in a location where relative humidity reaches 85% or more. Adjust the humidity
or relocate the printer to an appropriate environment.
Contacting Service
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error message on the
display.
You need to know your printer's model type and serial number. See the label located inside the side door of your printer.
Back to Contents Page
Back to Contents Page
Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy
Warranty and Return Policy
Contacting Dell
Dell Technical Support Policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting
process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software program and hardware drivers to the original
default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dellinstalled hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at Dell
Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for thirdparty software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed
through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Online Services
You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:
www.dell.com
www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only)
You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses:
Dell Support websites
support.dell.com
Dell Support e-mail addresses
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)
Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)
[email protected] (Canada only)
Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or
equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your
printer, see support.dell.com.
Recycling Information
It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers, and other peripherals in
an environmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products,
components, and/or materials.
For specific information on Dell's worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/recyclingworldwide.
Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-Dell (800-999-3355).
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice,
packing slip, bill, in your Dell catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product,
and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service
issues:
1. Visit support.dell.com.
2. Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page.
3. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.
4. Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5. Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.
Back to Contents Page

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project